Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 154

Instructions for customer

service engineers

District heating module TTE-FW

Hoval products must be installed and commissioned


only by appropriately qualified experts. These instruc-
tions are intended exclusively for the specialist. Elec-
trical installations may only be carried out by a qualified
electrician.

Subject to modifications | 4 214 513 / 04 - 06/17 EN


TABLE OF CONTENTS

1. Controller generation TopTronic® E ....................................................................................................... 5


1.1 System overview..................................................................................................................................................................5

2. Module diagrams TopTronic® E .............................................................................................................. 6


2.1 Basic module TTE-FW com..................................................................................................................................................6
2.2 Heating circuit/DHW module, TTE-HC/WW..........................................................................................................................6
2.3 Solar module, TTE-SOL........................................................................................................................................................6
2.4 Buffer module, TTE-PS.........................................................................................................................................................6
2.5 GLT module 0-10V, TTE-GLT 0-10V......................................................................................................................................6
2.6 Measured value module, TTE-MWA.....................................................................................................................................7
2.7 Module expansion TTE-FW..................................................................................................................................................7
2.8 Control module TTE-(R)BM..................................................................................................................................................9

3. Technical data........................................................................................................................................ 10

4. Setting the address of modules (DIP switches).................................................................................... 13

5. Setting the address of control modules................................................................................................ 14

6. Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors.................................................................................... 15


6.1 Setting the CAN bus terminating resistors on the module in question:..........................................................................15
6.2 Sample bus topologies.......................................................................................................................................................16
6.2.1 Example: Single-family home...........................................................................................................................................17
6.2.2 Example: Multi-family home ............................................................................................................................................18
6.2.3 Example: Double boiler ...................................................................................................................................................19
6.2.4 Example: Double boiler with gateway installed a long way away......................................................................................20
6.2.5 Example: Many controller modules, many control modules, long cable lengths.................................................................21

7. Switching time programs ...................................................................................................................... 22


7.1 Standard week programs heating circuits / hot water......................................................................................................22
7.2 Standard day programs heating circuits / hot water........................................................................................................23
7.3 Standard week programs circulation / free time clock.....................................................................................................24
7.4 Standard day programs circulation / free time clock........................................................................................................24

8. Overview of menu structure/function levels “Service” TTE-FW.......................................................... 25

9. Basic settings........................................................................................................................................ 29
9.1 Access levels / code input / user level..............................................................................................................................29
9.2 Hydraulic applications.......................................................................................................................................................29
9.3 Overview of hydraulic applications TTE-FW.....................................................................................................................29
9.4 Overview of input/output table ..........................................................................................................................................53
9.5 Function applications ........................................................................................................................................................61
9.6 Information (reference/actual values, operating states)...................................................................................................62
9.7 Adapting function name.....................................................................................................................................................62

10. Function modules and control functions.............................................................................................. 62


10.1 „General“ function group...................................................................................................................................................62
10.1.1 Overview of menu structure “General”..............................................................................................................................63
10.1.2 Parameter overview „General“.........................................................................................................................................64
10.1.3 IP config..........................................................................................................................................................................75
10.1.4 M-BUS.............................................................................................................................................................................75
10.1.5 M-BUS meter overview....................................................................................................................................................80
10.1.6 CAN-LON gateway ..........................................................................................................................................................81
10.1.7 Service info (customer service information)......................................................................................................................87
10.1.8 Bootloader.......................................................................................................................................................................89
10.1.9 General – sensor balancing.............................................................................................................................................89
10.1.10 Commands (reset)...........................................................................................................................................................91

2 4 214 513 / 04
TABLE OF CONTENTS

10.1.11 Outdoor sensor behaviour................................................................................................................................................91


10.1.12 Maintenance....................................................................................................................................................................94
10.1.13 Thermostat function.........................................................................................................................................................95
10.1.14 External fault reporting output (SMA)...............................................................................................................................95
10.1.15 External fault reporting input ..........................................................................................................................................95
10.1.16 Free time clock (32-022)..................................................................................................................................................96
10.1.17 Differential controller........................................................................................................................................................96
10.1.18 Plant flow control PFC.....................................................................................................................................................97
10.1.19 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output characteristic curve......................................................................................................99
10.1.20 Power limitation............................................................................................................................................................. 101
10.1.21 Cancelling the reduction................................................................................................................................................. 102
10.1.22 Return limitation in heating operation............................................................................................................................. 103
10.1.23 Faults............................................................................................................................................................................ 104
10.1.24 Relay test...................................................................................................................................................................... 104
10.1.25 TTE - sensor characteristics........................................................................................................................................... 105
10.1.26 Commissioning.............................................................................................................................................................. 106
10.1.27 Commissioning TopTronic® E module expansion............................................................................................................ 106
10.1.28 Commissioning of TopTronic® E Ethernet connection ..................................................................................................... 107
10.2 „Heating circuit“ function group..................................................................................................................................... 108
10.2.1 Overview of “heating circuit” menu structure.................................................................................................................. 109
10.2.2 Parameter overview „heating circuit 1 – 5“..................................................................................................................... 110
10.2.3 Heating characteristic.................................................................................................................................................... 117
10.2.4 Screed drying................................................................................................................................................................ 118
10.2.5 Basic programs.............................................................................................................................................................. 119
10.2.6 Heating-up optimisation................................................................................................................................................. 119
10.2.7 Outside temperature heating limit................................................................................................................................... 120
10.2.8 Special heating limit (auto eco mode)............................................................................................................................. 120
10.2.9 Special heating limits (flow reference value)................................................................................................................... 121
10.2.10 Deactivation when plant temperature is too low.............................................................................................................. 121
10.2.11 Room temperature compensation................................................................................................................................... 122
10.2.12 Room temperature heating limits.................................................................................................................................... 122
10.2.13 Heating circuit control.................................................................................................................................................... 123
10.2.14 Control strategy ............................................................................................................................................................ 124
10.2.15 Setpoint requirement type heating circuit ...................................................................................................................... 124
10.2.16 Pump control................................................................................................................................................................. 124
10.2.17 Mixer control.................................................................................................................................................................. 124
10.2.18 Forced energy................................................................................................................................................................ 124
10.2.19 Stand protection............................................................................................................................................................. 124
10.2.20 Plausibility test............................................................................................................................................................... 125
10.2.21 External constant requirement heating (ventilation, swimming pool, …).......................................................................... 125
10.2.22 Minimum value override................................................................................................................................................. 126
10.2.23 Switching modem contact heating (telephone contact)................................................................................................... 126
10.2.24 Room thermostat........................................................................................................................................................... 127
10.3 Function group „hot water“............................................................................................................................................. 128
10.3.1 Overview of menu structure “hot water”.......................................................................................................................... 128
10.3.2 Parameter overview „hot water 1-4“............................................................................................................................... 129
10.3.3 Reference value request type hot water ....................................................................................................................... 134
10.3.4 Reference value request type hot water......................................................................................................................... 135
10.3.5 DHW charging preference.............................................................................................................................................. 135
10.3.6 Sensor number (configuration 30-049):........................................................................................................................ 136
10.3.7 Hot water charging mode (parameter 05-011):............................................................................................................... 136
10.3.8 Allocation plant flow control – pilot control (parameter 05-089):................................................................................... 136
10.3.9 Post-control (configuration 30-051):............................................................................................................................. 136
10.3.10 External reference value (configuration 30-052):.......................................................................................................... 136
10.3.11 Forced energy choice (parameter 05-039)................................................................................................................... 136
10.3.12 Return limitation domestic hot water.............................................................................................................................. 137
10.3.13 Recirculation pump........................................................................................................................................................ 138
10.3.14 Switching modem contact (telephone contact)................................................................................................................ 139

4 214 513 / 04 3
TABLE OF CONTENTS

11. Charging systems:............................................................................................................................... 140


11.1 Hydraulic 59_TransTherm aqua L.................................................................................................................................... 140
11.2 Hydraulic 60_TransTherm aqua LS.................................................................................................................................. 143
11.3 Hydraulic 61_TransTherm aqua F.................................................................................................................................... 146
11.4 Input/output table for hydraulics 59, 60 and 61............................................................................................................... 148
11.5 Settings for Huba sensors of the aqua F......................................................................................................................... 148
11.6 Additional information about the charging systems...................................................................................................... 148
11.6.1 Hydraulic 60_TransTherm aqua LS:............................................................................................................................... 148
11.6.2 Hydraulic 61_TransTherm aqua F:................................................................................................................................. 149

12. Error code list 1):.................................................................................................................................. 150

4 4 214 513 / 04
1. Controller generation TopTronic® E
The TopTronic®E controller system is based on independent controller units (modules) that are connected together via the Hoval CAN bus. The individual modules
can be set using one or more control modules.

• A maximum of 16 intelligent modules can be connected. In the TTE-WEZ module, it is possible to use 16 modules as well, although only 8 heat generators can

4 214 513 / 04
be controlled.

• Maximum 11 TTE-FW modules can be installed in the master/slave group


• Max. two TTE-FE expansion modules can be connected to the intelligent modules. (Exception: max. 1 expansion module for TTE H-Gen module)
• A maximum of 5 module expansions can be connected to the TTE-FW module

1.1 System overview


Controller generation TopTronic® E

5
Module diagrams TopTronic® E

2. Module diagrams TopTronic® E


2.1 Basic module TTE-FW com

2.2 Heating circuit/DHW module, TTE-HC/WW


2.3 Solar module, TTE-SOL
2.4 Buffer module, TTE-PS
2.5 GLT module 0-10V, TTE-GLT 0-10V
The connection technology of the four modules is identical. Each module is available as an individual article, however
(different software and further details).

6 4 214 513 / 04
Module diagrams TopTronic® E

2.6 Measured value module, TTE-MWA


This module is used for integrating external M-bus units.

4321 - + L H +
OFF
ON
MBUS CAN
ON ADR. R-CAN

TTE – MWA
(M-Bus)

2.7 Module expansion TTE-FW


Universal module for hardware expansion of inputs/outputs. Max. 5 module expansions can be connected to it. The
connection to the particular control module is made using a ribbon cable (GB plug)

NOTICE
Important: Please note that max. 5 heating and 4 hot water circuits can be configured. This figure also
includes the first two heating circuits or the first hot water circuit on the basic module.

4 214 513 / 04 7
Module diagrams TopTronic® E

TTE-FW module legend:

LON-BUS LON-BUS
R-CAN CAN terminating resistor
CAN CAN bus
AF Outdoor sensor
RLF Primary return sensor
VF Flow sensor
VF1 Flow sensor
SF1 Hot water sensor 1
SF2 Hot water sensor 2
VE1 Variable input DI/0-10V/4-20mA
VE2 Variable input DI/0-10V/4-20mA
VE3 Variable input PT1000
VE4 Variable input DI/PT1000
VE5 Variable input DI/PT1000
VE6 Variable input DI/PT1000
VE7 Variable input DI/PT1000
VE8 Variable input DI/PT1000/0-10V
VE9 Variable input DI/PT1000/0-10V
VE10 Variable input IMP
VA1 Variable output 0-10V/0-20mA
VA2 Variable output volt-free
VA3 Variable output 0-10V/PWM
VA4 Variable output 0-10V/PWM
VA5 Variable output 0-10V/PWM
MBUS M-BUS
RS485 RS485 master/slave
GB Unit bus internal
ADR. Address switch
LAN-I/O Interface expansion
3V3 3.3 VDC supply
Netz-in Supply
WMZ Output supply heat quantity meter
DKP Direct circuit pump
YFW Actuator, mixer primary side
MC1 Pump mixer circuit 1
YK1 Actuator mixer 1
SLP1 Buffer storage pump 1
SLP2 Buffer storage pump 2

Module expansions legend:

AF Outdoor sensor
CAN System data bus
DKP Pumps for heating circuit without mixer
FVT-F Flow rate sensor (F = flow rate)
FVT-T Flow rate sensor (T = temperature)
GB Units data bus internal
MBUS M-Bus (meter)
MC1 Pump mixer circuit 1
Netz-In Mains input 230V~/13A slow-blow
Netz-out Mains output 230V~ max. 4 A slow-blow

8 4 214 513 / 04
Module diagrams TopTronic® E

OT Heat generator data bus (OpenTherm)


OP Optocoupler
RS485 Heat generator data bus (RS485)
S1 External main switch / supply automatic unit
SF Calorifier heater sensor
SK-VA3 Safety chain VA3 output
SLP Calorifier loading pump
VA1,2,3 Variable output 1,2,3
VA10V/PWM Variable output 0-10V/PWM
VE1,2,3 (IMP) Variable input 1,2 (IMP = sensor or pulse)
VE10V 1,2,3 Variable input 0-10V 1,2,3
VE230V 1,2 Variable input 230V 1,2
VF1,2,3 Flow sensor 1,2,3
YK1,2,3 Actuator mixer 1,2,3

2.8 Control module TTE-(R)BM

4 214 513 / 04 9
Technical data

3. Technical data
Designation/type TopTronic® E basic module TopTronic® E basic module
district heating/fresh water district heating
Abbreviation TTE-FW TTE-FW com
Power supply Max 230 V AC +6 - 10% 230 V AC +6 - 10%
Frequency 50 – 60 Hz 50 – 60 Hz
Max. power consumption incl. bus supply, approx. 18.3 W approx. 18.3 W
module expansions
Max. power consumption approx. 5.4 W approx. 5.4 W
Min. power consumption approx. 0.7 W approx. 0.8 W
Fuse H5.0AF H5.0AF
Outputs (low voltage)
Fully electronic relays - -
Electromechanical relays 9 9
Outputs (extra-low voltage)
Signal output PWM or 0-10V 4 4
Switching capacity
Fully electronic relays - -
Electromechanical relays 5 (5) A 5 (5) A
Inputs (high-voltage)
Optocoupler input - -
Inputs (extra-low voltage)
Input 0-10V 4 4
Inputs sensors 11 11
Inputs vortex sensor - -
Pulse input 1 1
Expansion (module expansion)
max. number 5 5
Casing
Installation Top hat rail mounting Top hat rail mounting
Dimensions W/H/D in mm incl. plug 250x120x75 250x120x75
Ambient temperature 0 … 50 °C 0 … 50 °C
Storage temperature - 20 ... 60 °C - 20 ... 60 °C
Relative humidity 20-80% 20-80%
Bus system (Hoval CAN bus)
Capacity max. 4 control modules / max. 4 control modules /
3 control modules + 3 control modules +
1 gateway 1 gateway
Bus supply yes yes
Bus line 4-wire bus 4-wire bus
Bus length twisted, shielded, max. twisted, shielded, max.
100 m 100 m
Line cross-section min 0.5 mm² min 0.5 mm²
Other bus interfaces
Internal unit bus (master) Internal unit bus (master)

10 4 214 513 / 04
Technical data

Designation/type TopTronic® E basic module TopTronic® E basic module


district heating/fresh water district heating
M-bus M-bus
RS485 LON
RS485
TCP/IP optional
Miscellaneous
Spring reserve approx. 96 hours (supercapa- approx. 96 hours (supercapa-
citor) citor)
Type of protection IP 20 IP 20
Protection class II – EN 60730 II – EN 60730
Plug types Rast5 (coloured, coded), Rast5 (coloured, coded),
alternative plug-in terminal alternative plug-in terminal
technology technology

Designation/type TopTronic® E Ethernet connection


module expansions TopTronic® E
district heating district heating com
Abbreviation TTE-FE FW UNI -
Power supply Max 230 V AC +6 - 10% 3.3VDC
Frequency 50 – 60 Hz -
Max. power consumption incl. bus supply, - -
module expansions
Max. power consumption approx. 1.8 W approx. 0.5 W
Min. power consumption approx. 1.6 W approx. 0.5 W
Fuse H5.0AF -
Outputs (low voltage)
Fully electronic relays - -
Electromechanical relays 3 -
Outputs (extra-low voltage)
Signal output PWM or 0-10V - -
Switching capacity
Fully electronic relays - -
Electromechanical relays 5 (5) A -
Inputs (high-voltage)
Optocoupler input -
Inputs (extra-low voltage)
Input 0-10V 1 -
Inputs sensors 3 -
Inputs vortex sensor - -
Pulse input - -
Expansion (module expansion)
max. number - -
Casing
Installation Top hat rail mounting Top hat rail mounting
Dimensions W/H/D in mm incl. plug 95x125x95 46x125x51
Ambient temperature 0 … 50 °C 0 … 50 °C

4 214 513 / 04 11
Technical data

Designation/type TopTronic® E Ethernet connection


module expansions TopTronic® E
district heating district heating com
Storage temperature - 20 ... 60 °C - 20 ... 60 °C
Relative humidity 20-80% 20-80%
Bus system (Hoval CAN bus)
Capacity - -
Bus supply - -
Bus line - -
Bus length - -
Line cross-section - -
Other bus interfaces
Internal unit bus (slave) Internal unit bus (slave)
-
-

Miscellaneous
Spring reserve - -
Type of protection IP 10 IP 10
Protection class II – EN 60730 II – EN 60730
Plug types Rast5 (coloured, coded), -

12 4 214 513 / 04
Setting the address of modules (DIP switches)

4. Setting the address of modules (DIP switches)


The addresses of the individual modules are set using the DIP switches on the circuit board (Remove casing cover).
Each module must have a different address. The addresses do not have to be set in consecutive sequence.

The factory settings for the modules were selected so that there is no need to change the address settings, as long
as no module occurs twice.

DIP switch Addr. Factory setting DIP switch Addr. Factory setting
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 1 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 9 TTE-HK/WW
On (TTE H-Gen no. 1) On TTE-FW

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 2 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 10 TTE-FW
On (TTE H-Gen no. 2) On

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
TTE-FW / TTE-FW
Off 3 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 11 charging systems
On (TTE H-Gen no. 3) On

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 4 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 12 TTE-GLT (0-10V)
On (TTE H-Gen no. 4) On

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 5 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 13 TTE-MWA (M-Bus)
On (TTE H-Gen no. 5) On

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 6 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 14
On (TTE H-Gen no. 6) On

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 7 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 15 TTE-PS
On (TTE H-Gen no. 7) On

4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
Off 8 TTE-WEZ / TTE-FW Off 16 TTE-SOL
On (TTE H-Gen no. 8) On

4 214 513 / 04 13
Setting the address of control modules

5. Setting the address of control modules


Setting example: Room control module for the 2nd heating circuit
1: Call up commissioning wizard
2: Enter address no. of control module
3: Select and acknowledge controller module type

DIP: 1 DIP: 2 DIP: 3 DIP: 4 DIP: 5 DIP: 6 DIP: 7 DIP: 8

TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ


TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW
TTE-HK/WW TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT
TTE-GLT TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA
TTE-MWA TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW
TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS
TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL

BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM
(ohne HK) 1 (ohne HK) 2 (ohne HK) 3 (ohne HK) 4 (ohne HK) 5 (ohne HK) 6 (ohne HK) 7 (ohne HK) 8

RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM


(HK1)
17 (HK1)
20 (HK1)
23 (HK1)
26 (HK1)
29 (HK1)
32 (HK1)
35 (HK1)
38

RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM


(HK2) 18 (HK2) 21 (HK2) 24 (HK2) 27 (HK2) 30 (HK2) 33 (HK2) 36 (HK2) 39

RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM


(HK3) 19 (HK3) 22 (HK3) 25 (HK3) 28 (HK3) 31 (HK3) 34 (HK3) 37 (HK3) 40

DIP: 9 DIP: 10 DIP: 11 DIP: 12 DIP: 13 DIP: 14 DIP: 15 DIP: 16

TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ TTE-WEZ


TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW TTE-FW
TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT TTE-GLT
TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA TTE-MWA
TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW TTE-HK/WW
TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS TTE-PS
TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL TTE-SOL

BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM
(ohne HK) 9 (ohne HK) 10 (ohne HK) 11 (ohne HK) 12 (ohne HK) 13 (ohne HK) 14 (ohne HK) 15 (ohne HK) 16

RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM


(HK1)
41 (HK1)
44 (HK1)
47 (HK1)
50 (HK1)
53 (HK1)
56 (HK1)
59 (HK1)
62

RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM


(HK2) 42 (HK2) 45 (HK2) 48 (HK2) 51 (HK2) 54 (HK2) 57 (HK2) 60 (HK2) 63

RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM RBM


(HK3) 43 (HK3) 46 (HK3) 49 (HK3) 52 (HK3) 55 (HK3) 58 (HK3) 61

BM … Control module
RBM .. Room control module

14 4 214 513 / 04
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

6. Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors


6.1 Setting the CAN bus terminating resistors on the module in question:

Basic module/controller modules (e.g.: TTE-H-Gen):

DIP switch ON ==
bus terminating resistor
activated.

Control module (TTE-BM)

Detailed view DIP switch ON ==


bus terminating resistor
activated.

Gateway (TTE-GW):

DIP switch ON ==
bus terminating resistor
activated.

Detailed view

4 214 513 / 04 15
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

HomeVent (TTE-HV):

View extract mainboard MP04

DIP switch on 5+6 ON ==


bus terminating resistor activated.

Detailed view

6.2 Sample bus topologies


The bus terminating resistors must be activated on the two modules that are furthest apart from one another
(see examples below)

In larger systems containing several control modules, it was very difficult to connect the right CAN terminators as
the behaviour was affected by the internal CAN fixed resistors. With these fixed resistors removed (new hardware
>=V1.00.003), it is significantly easier to connect the right CAN resistors. In larger systems, these are always the two
furthest apart CAN nodes in the control system to which the terminators are to be connected. It should be noted that
the CAN resistors are switched on by default in the TTE-H-Gen module. In most cases, these must be deactivated
now.

Incorrectly set CAN resistors are often indicated in the Service screen when the modules disappear briefly (e.g. the
service GW has been connected as well). In addition, the TTE-BM module monitors the bus error rate of the system.
If this exceeds a bus error rate > 3.5 per thousand on one or more TTE-BMs, a warning W:31 is generated. The error
rate can be requested in the module›s Service menu.
TTE-BM: System–General–All data pt.- par. 20-127, 20-126 (threshold fault rate adjustable par. 20-125)
TTE-H-Gen, TTE-PS, … general – general – malfunctions par. 20-127, 20-126

Extract HW version history TopTronic-E modules


Module HW version Date Changes (compared to previous version)
TTE-H-Gen V 1.01.xxx, Approx. CAN bus 1 kOhm fixed resistor removed;
V 1.00.003 04.2016 only connectible CAN terminators remaining
V 1.00.xxx 2014-10-01 First series production hardware
TTE-FE V 1.00.xxx 2015-03-01 First series production hardware
TTE-HC-DHW V 1.01.xxx, Approx. CAN bus 1 kOhm fixed resistor removed;
V 1.00.003 04.2016 only connectible CAN terminators remaining
V 1.00.xxx 2015-03-01 First series production hardware
TTE-PS V 1.01.xxx, Approx. CAN bus 1 kOhm fixed resistor removed;
V 1.00.003 04.2016 only connectible CAN terminators remaining
V 1.00.xxx 2015-03-01 First series production hardware
TTE-SOL V 1.01.xxx, Approx. CAN bus 1 kOhm fixed resistor removed;
V 1.00.003 04.2016 only connectible CAN terminators remaining
V 1.00.xxx 2015-03-01 First series production hardware
TTE-GLT V 1.01.xxx, Approx. CAN bus 1 kOhm fixed resistor removed;
V 1.00.003 04.2016 only connectible CAN terminators remaining
V 1.00.xxx 2015-03-01 First series production hardware

16 4 214 513 / 04
6.2.1 Example: Single-family home

Old hardware New hardware >= V1.00.003


Topologie 1 Topologie 1

4 214 513 / 04
Einfamilienhaus = 3 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND
Einfamilienhaus = 3 Pol = CA
= 4 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND/12V = 4 Pol = CA

Control Control
module Ground floor module Ground floor

Heat generator Bus terminating resistor "ON" Heat generator Bus terminating resistor "ON"
Set both DIP switches to ON Set both DIP switches to ON

Control Control
module module
2m 2m
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

20m - 50m 20m - 50m

Basic modu- 5m Solar Basic modu- 5m Solar


le H-Gen module le H-Gen module

Bus terminating resistor "ON" (factory setting) Bus terminating resistor "ON" (factory setting)

17
18
6.2.2 Example: Multi-family home
Topologie 3 Topologie 3
Mehrfamilienhaus klein = 3 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND
Mehrfamilienhaus klein
Old hardware New hardware
= 4 >=
Pol V1.00.003
= CANH/CANL/GND/12V

50m – 200m Control 50m – 200m Control


Family 3 Family 3
module module

Heat generator Bus terminating resistor "ON" Heat generator Bus terminating resistor "ON"
Set both DIP switches to ON Set both DIP switches to ON

2m Control 20m – 50m Control Family 2 2m Control 20m – 50m Control Family 2
module module module module
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

20m -50m Control Family 1 20m -50m Control Family 1


module module

5m 5m

Basic modu- MK Basic modu- MK


le H-Gen module le H-Gen module

Bus terminating resistor "ON" (factory setting) Bus terminating resistor "ON"
(factory setting)

4 214 513 / 04
Topologie
6.2.3 1
Example: Double boiler Topologie 1
Einfamilienhaus = 3 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND
Einfamilienhaus = 3 Pol = CANH/CANL/G
= 4 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND/12V = 4 Pol = CANH/CANL/G
Old hardware New hardware >= V1.00.003

4 214 513 / 04
Heat generator Heat generator Heat generator Heat generator

Control Control Control Control


module module module module
2m 2m 2m 2m
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

Basic mo- 5m Solar Solar 5m Basic mo- Basic mo- 5m Solar Solar 5m Basic mo-
dule H-Gen module module dule H-Gen dule H-Gen module module dule H-Gen

Bus terminating resistor "ON" Bus terminating resistor "ON" Bus terminating resistor "ON" Bus terminating resistor "ON"
(factory setting) (factory setting)

Notice:
Both base models (H-Gen) have their terminating resistors activated
in the factory settings so there is nothing to change here.

19
20
6.2.4 Example: Double boiler with gateway installed a long way away

Old hardware New hardware >= V1.00.003

Topologie 1 Topologie 1
Einfamilienhaus = 3 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND Einfamilienhaus = 3 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND
= 4 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND/12V = 4 Pol = CANH/CANL/GND/12V
Bus terminating resistor "ON" Bus terminating resistor "ON"
Set both DIP switches to ON. Set both DIP switches to ON.

GW GW

50m 50m
Heat generator Heat generator Heat generator Heat generator

Control Control Control Control


module module module module
2m 2m 2m 2m
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

Basic mo- 5m Solar Solar 5m Basic mo- Basic mo- 5m Solar Solar 5m Basic mo-
dule H-Gen module module dule H-Gen dule H-Gen module module dule H-Gen

Bus terminating resistor "ON" Bus terminating resistor "OFF" Bus terminating resistor "ON"
(factory setting)

4 214 513 / 04
6.2.5 Example: Many controller modules, many control modules, long cable lengths

Heat generator

4 214 513 / 04
Control Control Control
Control 1m 3st floor module 3st floor module 3st floor module
module
Control Control Control
2st floor 2st floor 2st floor
module module module

1st floor Control 1st floor Control 1st floor Control


module module module

GW

Control module Module expansion Module expansion


1m HC/DHW FE FE
Bus topologies and CAN terminating resistors

Control module Module expansion Module expansion


Basic module HC/DHW FE FE
H-Gen
Control module Module expansion Module expansion
HC/DHW FE FE

Wall casing

Checkback with Technology, detailed clarification required!

21
22
7. Switching time programs
7.1 Standard week programs heating circuits / hot water
Heating circuits:
MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
All day All day All day All day All day All day All day
00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C

Week 1
06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C

MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN


Morning & evening Morning & evening Morning & evening Morning & evening Morning & evening All day All day
Switching time programs

00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C
06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C

Week 2
08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C
16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C

Hot water:
MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
All day All day All day All day All day All day All day
00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C

Week 1
05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C

MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN


Morning & evening Morning & evening Morning & evening Morning & evening Morning & evening All day All day
00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C
05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C

Week 2
08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C 08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C 08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C 08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C 08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C
15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C 15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C

4 214 513 / 04
7.2 Standard day programs heating circuits / hot water

Heating circuits: Hot water:



All day 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C All day 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C

4 214 513 / 04
06:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 50°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C
Longer day 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C Morning & evening 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C
06:00 - 23:00 / 22°C, 23°C 05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C
23:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C
15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C
Morning & evening 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C Only evening 00:00 - 15:30 / 45°C
Switching time programs

06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C


08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C
16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C
Only evening 00:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C All day legio 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C
16:00 - 23:00 / 22°C, 23°C 05:30 - 15:30 / 50°C
23:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 15:30 - 16:30 / 60°C
16:30 - 22:00 / 50°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C
NEW 00:00 - 06:00 / 16°C, 28°C NEW 00:00 - 05:30 / 45°C
06:00 - 08:00 / 22°C, 23°C 05:30 - 08:00 / 50°C
08:00 - 16:00 / 16°C, 28°C 08:00 - 15:30 / 45°C
16:00 - 22:00 / 22°C, 23°C 15:30 - 22:00 / 50°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 16°C, 28°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 45°C

23
24
7.3 Standard week programs circulation / free time clock
Circulation *):
MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
All day All day All day All day All day All day All day
00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C

Week
05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C
22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C
*) In variant without circulation sensor, a threshold value of 15°C is stored. This means switching points less tham 15 °C = OFF, greater than 15 °C = ON

Free time clock:


MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT SUN
All day All day All day All day All day All day All day
Switching time programs

00:00 - 06:00 / 0 00:00 - 06:00 / 0 00:00 - 06:00 / 0 00:00 - 06:00 / 0 00:00 - 06:00 / 0 00:00 - 06:00 / 0 00:00 - 06:00 / 0

Week
06:00 - 22:00 / 1 06:00 - 22:00 / 1 06:00 - 22:00 / 1 06:00 - 22:00 / 1 06:00 - 22:00 / 1 06:00 - 22:00 / 1 06:00 - 22:00 / 1
22:00 - 24:00 / 0 22:00 - 24:00 / 0 22:00 - 24:00 / 0 22:00 - 24:00 / 0 22:00 - 24:00 / 0 22:00 - 24:00 / 0 22:00 - 24:00 / 0

7.4 Standard day programs circulation / free time clock


Circulation Free time clock
00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 0
05:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 06:00 - 22:00 / 1
All day 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C All day 22:00 - 24:00 / 0
00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C
05:30 - 08:00 / 45°C
08:00 - 15:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 0
15:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 06:00 - 23:00 / 1
Morning & evening 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C Longer day 23:00 - 24:00 / 0
00:00 - 15:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 0
15:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 06:00 - 08:00 / 1
22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C 08:00 - 16:00 / 0
16:00 - 22:00 / 1
Only evening Morning & evening 22:00 - 24:00 / 0
00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C
05:30 - 15:30 / 45°C
15:30 - 16:30 / 60°C 00:00 - 16:00 / 0
16:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 16:00 - 23:00 / 1
All day legio 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C Only evening 23:00 - 24:00 / 0
00:00 - 05:30 / 10°C 00:00 - 06:00 / 0
05:30 - 08:00 / 45°C 06:00 - 08:00 / 1
08:00 - 15:30 / 10°C 08:00 - 16:00 / 0
15:30 - 22:00 / 45°C 16:00 - 22:00 / 1
NEW 22:00 - 24:00 / 10°C NEW 22:00 - 24:00 / 0

4 214 513 / 04
Overview of menu structure/function levels “Service” TTE-FW

8. Overview of menu structure/function levels “Service” TTE-FW


In the main menu, the function levels are accessed using the “Service” button. The access depth depends on the
previously entered code/user level.

Menu structure TTE-FW part 1

Address
Service
(controller)

Function group Function group Function group


(FunctionGroup 0) (FunctionGroup 1) (FunctionGroup 2)

General Heating circuit Hot water


(FunctionGroupName) (FunctionGroupName) (FunctionGroupName)

Function Operation Function Operation Function Operation


(FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup) (FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup) (FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup)

General Heating circuit 1 Hot water 1


(FunctionName) Information 0-10V/PWM (FunctionName) Information (FunctionName) Information
General Heating circuit 1 Hot water 1
(DefaultValue) (DefaultValue) (DefaultValue)

Function Function Function


Clock - date
name name name
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 1) (FunctionNumber 1)

Heating circuit 2 Hot water 2


Configuration Faults (FunctionName) Configuration (FunctionName) Configuration
Heating circuit 2 Hot water 2
(DefaultValue) (DefaultValue)

Heating
Cleaning Relay test Parameters
characteristic
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 2) (FunctionNumber 2)

Heating circuit 3 Cooling Hot water 3 Time


Maintenance Sensors (FunctionName) (FunctionName)
characteristic programmes
Heating circuit 3 Hot water 3
(DefaultValue) (DefaultValue)

Commis-
Parameters IP config Screed
sioning
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 3) (FunctionNumber 3)

Heating circuit 4 Hot water 4


Thermostat MBUS (FunctionName) Parameters (FunctionName)

Heating circuit 4 Hot water 4


(DefaultValue) (DefaultValue)

CAN-LON- Time
Diff. control
GW programmes

Function
(FunctionNumber 4)
Plant flow Commis-
CS info Heating circuit 5
contr (FunctionName)
sioning

Heating circuit 5
(DefaultValue)
Sensor Manual
balancing operating
mode

Bootloader

Commis-
sioning

4 214 513 / 04 25
Overview of menu structure/function levels “Service” TTE-FW

Menu structure TTE-FW part 2 TO FOLLOW

Function group Function group Function group


(FunctionGroup 3) (FunctionGroup 4) (FunctionGroup 10)

Heat manager Cascade manager Heat generator


(FunctionGroupName) (FunctionGroupName) (FunctionGroupName)

Function Operation Function Operation Function Operation


(FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup) (FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup) (FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup)
Heat manager Cascade manager 1 Additional heat
(FunctionName) Information (FunctionName) Information generator Information
(FunctionName)
Heat manager Cascade manager 1 Additional heat
(DefaultValue) (DefaultValue) generator
(DefaultValue)
Function Function Function
name name name
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 1...7) (FunctionNumber 1)

Heat generator
Configuration Cascade manager Configuration (FunctionName) Configuration
2...8
(FunctionName) Heat generator
(DefaultValue)

Parameters Parameters Parameters

Commis-
sioning

Emission

Manual
operating
mode

26 4 214 513 / 04
Overview of menu structure/function levels “Service” TTE-FW

Menu structure TTE-FW part 3

Function group Function group


(FunctionGroup 20) (FunctionGroup 61)

MBUS Week prog.


(FunctionGroupName) (FunctionGroupName)

Function
(FunctionNumber 1)

MBus 1
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 16) (FunctionNumber 48)
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 2) (FunctionNumber 11) HtC 1 Prg 1 HWC 1 Prg 1
MBus 2 MBus 11 (FunctionName) (FunctionName)

Function Function Operation


(FunctionNumber 3) (FunctionNumber 12) (DisplayGroup) Function Function
(FunctionNumber 17) (FunctionNumber 49)
MBus 3 MBus 12
Information
Function Function HtC 1 Prg 2 HWC 1 Prg 2
(FunctionName) (FunctionName)
(FunctionNumber 4) (FunctionNumber 13)

MBus 4 MBus 13
Function Function
Function Function (FunctionNumber 24) (FunctionNumber 56)
(FunctionNumber 5) (FunctionNumber 14)

MBus 5 MBus 14 HtC 2 Prg 1 HWC 2 Prg 1


(FunctionName) (FunctionName)

Function Function
(FunctionNumber 6) (FunctionNumber 15)
MBus 6 MBus 15 Function Function
(FunctionNumber 25) (FunctionNumber 57)

Function Function HtC 2 Prg 2


(FunctionNumber 7) (FunctionNumber 16) HWC 2 Prg 2
(FunctionName) (FunctionName)
MBus 7 MBus 16

Function Function Function


(FunctionNumber 8) (FunctionNumber 32) (FunctionNumber 64)
MBus 8
HtC 3 Prg 1 CIR Prg
(FunctionName) (FunctionName)
Function
(FunctionNumber 9)

MBus 9
Function Function
(FunctionNumber 33) (FunctionNumber 112)
Function
(FunctionNumber 10)
HtC 3 Prg 2 FTC Prg
MBus 10 (FunctionName) (FunctionName)

4 214 513 / 04 27
Overview of menu structure/function levels “Service” TTE-FW

Menu structure TTE-FW part 4

Function group Function group


(FunctionGroup 62) (FunctionGroup ?)

Day prog. Sp. time prog.


(FunctionGroupName) (FunctionGroupName)

Function Function
(FunctionNumber 16-20) (FunctionNumber 0)

Circulation
HtC 1 Prg 1-5 (FunctionName)
(FunctionName)
Circulation
(DefaultValue)

Function Function
(FunctionNumber 24-28) (FunctionNumber 1)

Free time clock


HtC 2 Prg 1-5 (FunctionName)
(FunctionName)
Free time clock
(DefaultValue)

Function
(FunctionNumber 32-36)

HtC 3 Prg 1-5


(FunctionName)

Function
(FunctionNumber 48-52)

HWC 1 Prg 1-5


(FunctionName)

Function
(FunctionNumber 56-60)

HWC 2 Prg 1-5


(FunctionName)

Function
(FunctionNumber 64)

CIR Prg
(FunctionName)

Function
(FunctionNumber 112)

FTC Prg
(FunctionName)

28 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

9. Basic settings
9.1 Access levels / code input / user level
The TopTronic® E control system provides different access levels. The codes are entered in the main menu – “User
Level” menu item.

Levels (code):
Operator code: No code
Technical operator code: .………………………………
Service - IBN code: .………………………………
Specialist code: .………………………………
OEM code: .………………………………

9.2 Hydraulic applications


To facilitate setting and commissioning of the TopTronic® E control system, predefined hydraulic applications can be
selected in each module. Selecting the corresponding hydraulics sets very many parameters to the correct value. At
the same time, this defines the input/output allocations of the functions. If a hydraulic application is adjusted, this me-
ans the parameters in the individual functions are reset to their factory setting at the same time. In this instance, the
set texts, IP settings and CAN LON parameters remain unchanged. Consequently, during commissioning of the control
system, always set the hydraulic application first.

The hydraulic application is set in the menu: General – General – Configuration – Par. 04-077:

9.3 Overview of hydraulic applications TTE-FW


Hydraulic applications TTE-FW part 1:
Hydraulics 1:

Heating network Building system

4 214 513 / 04 29
Basic settings

Hydraulics 2:

Heating circuit

Heating network

Hydraulics 3:

Heating circuit

Heating network

30 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 4:

Storage tank Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Heating network

Hydraulics 5:

Storage tank Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Heating network

4 214 513 / 04 31
Basic settings

Hydraulics 6: Spare

Hydraulics 7: Spare

Hydraulics 8: Spare

Hydraulics 9:

Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

Hydraulics 10: Spare

32 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 11:

Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating network

Hydraulics 12:

Storage tank Heating circuit Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 33
Basic settings

Hydraulics 13:

Storage tank Heating circuit Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 14:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Heating network

34 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 15:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 16:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 35
Basic settings

Hydraulics 17:

Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 18:

Storage tank Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

36 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 19:

Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 20: Spare


Hydraulics 21: Spare
Hydraulics 22: Spare
Hydraulics 23: Spare

Hydraulics 24:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 37
Basic settings

Hydraulics 25:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

Hydraulics 26:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

38 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 27:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

Hydraulics 28:

Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 39
Basic settings

Hydraulics 29:

Storage tank Heating circuit Heating circuit Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 30:

Storage tank Heating circuit Heating circuit Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

40 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 31:

Storage tank Heating circuit Heating circuit Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 32:

Buffer storage
Heating circuit Heating circuit circuit
Storage tank

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 41
Basic settings

Hydraulics 33:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 34:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Heating
network

42 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 35:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 36:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 43
Basic settings

Hydraulics 37:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 38:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

44 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 39:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 40: Spare


Hydraulics 41: Spare
Hydraulics 42: Spare
Hydraulics 43: Spare
Hydraulics 44: Spare
Hydraulics 45: Spare

Hydraulics 46:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit


Storage tank

Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 45
Basic settings

Hydraulics 47:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

Hydraulics 48:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

46 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 49:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

Hydraulics 50:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 47
Basic settings

Hydraulics 51:

Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit

Buffer storage circuit

Storage tank

Heating
network

Hydraulics 52: Spare

Hydraulics 53:

Storage tank Heating circuit Heating circuit Heating circuit Buffer storage circuit

Heating
network

48 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 54:

Heating Heating Heating Buffer storage


Storage tank circuit circuit circuit circuit

Heating
network

Hydraulics 55:

Heating Heating Heating Buffer storage


Storage tank circuit circuit circuit circuit

Heating
network

4 214 513 / 04 49
Basic settings

Hydraulics 56:

Heating Building
network system

Hydraulics 57 (aqua L):

Wärmenetz

In hydraulics 57, the transfer station (primary exchanger) can also be regulated via the TTE district heating module
(com) DHW controller.

50 4 214 513 / 04
Basic settings

Hydraulics 58 (stand-alone or in conjunction with Hoval heat generator without pump speed control, aqua L):

Wärmenetz

Hydraulics 59 (stand-alone or in conjunction with Hoval heat generator with pump speed control, aqua L):

4 214 513 / 04 51
Basic settings

Hydraulics 60 (aqua LS):

Hydraulics 61 (aqua F):

52 4 214 513 / 04
9.4 Overview of input/output table
Hydraulics input/output table 1-20

TTE-FW
Function
DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 VE1 VE2 VE3* VE4 VE5* VE6 VE7 VE8 VE9 VE10 VA1 VA2 VA3 VA4 VA5 M-BUS

4 214 513 / 04
Hydr 1 FW YFW AF RLF VF RLF2 VFP
Basic settings

Hydr 2 FW DKP YFW AF RLF VF RLF2 VFP

Hydr 3 FW YFW MK1 YK1 AF RLF VF VF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 4 FW DKP YFW YFW2 ZKP SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP RLFZ

Hydr 5 FW YFW YFW2 ZKP SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP RLFZ

Hydr 6

Hydr 7

Hydr 8

Hydr 9 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 ZKP SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP RLFZ

Hydr 10

Hydr 11 FW YFW MK1 YK1 ZKP SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP RLFZ
...
Hydr 12 FW DKP YFW SLP1 AF RLF VF SF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 13 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VF1 SF RLF2 VFP

Hydr 14 FW DKP YFW DKP2 AF RLF VF VF2 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 15 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 AF RLF VF VF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 16 FW YFW MK1 YK1 AF RLF VF VF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 17 FW DKP YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 18 FW DKP YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 19 FW YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 20

53
54
1. TTE-FE 2. TTE-FE 3. TTE-FE
Function SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/
VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V
VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM

Hydr 1 FW

Hydr 2 FW
Basic settings

Hydr 3 FW

Hydr 4 FW

Hydr 5 FW YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1

Hydr 6

Hydr 7

Hydr 8

Hydr 9 FW

Hydr 10

Hydr 11 FW

Hydr 12 FW

Hydr 13 FW

Hydr 14 FW

Hydr 15 FW

Hydr 16 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 17 FW DKP2 x VF2

Hydr 18 FW YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1

Hydr 19 FW YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1 YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 20

*VE3 = Secondary return sensor

*VE5 = Primary flow sensor (optional)

4 214 513 / 04
Hydraulics input/output table 21-40

TTE-FW
Function
DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 VE1 VE2 VE3* VE4 VE5* VE6 VE7 VE8 VE9 VE10 VA1 VA2 VA3 VA4 VA5 M-BUS

4 214 513 / 04
Hydr 21

Hydr 22
Basic settings

Hydr 23

Hydr 24 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 25 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP VFW

Hydr 26 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 27 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP VFW

Hydr 28 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 29 FW DKP YFW DKP2 SLP AF RLF VF VF2 SF RLF2 VFP

Hydr 30 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 31 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 32 FW DKP YFW DKP2 AF RLF VF VF2 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 33 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 AF RLF VF VF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 34 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 AF RLF VF VF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 35 FW YFW MK1 YK1 AF RLF VF VF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 36 FW DKP YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 37 FW DKP YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 38 FW DKP YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 39 FW YFW YFW2 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 40

55
56
1. TTE-FE 2. TTE-FE 3. TTE-FE
Function SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/
VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V
VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM

Hydr 21

Hydr 22
Basic settings

Hydr 23

Hydr 24 FW DKP2 VF2

Hydr 25 FW

Hydr 26 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 27 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 28 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ YK3- MK3 x VF3

Hydr 29 FW

Hydr 30 FW

Hydr 31 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 32 FW DKP3 x VF3

Hydr 33 FW DKP2 x VF2

Hydr 34 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 35 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ YK3- MK3 x VF3

Hydr 36 FW DKP2 x VF2 DKP3 x VF3

Hydr 37 FW DKP2 x VF2 YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1

Hydr 38 FW YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1 YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 39 FW YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1 YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ YK3- MK3 x VF3

Hydr 40

*VE3 = Secondary return sensor

*VE5 = Primary flow sensor (optional)

4 214 513 / 04
Hydraulics input/output table 41-58

TTE-FW
Function
DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 VE1 VE2 VE3* VE4 VE5* VE6 VE7 VE8 VE9 VE10 VA1 VA2 VA3 VA4 VA5 M-Bus
Hydr 41

4 214 513 / 04
Hydr 42
Basic settings

Hydr 43

Hydr 44

Hydr 45

Hydr 46 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP VFW

Hydr 47 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 48 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP VFW

Hydr 49 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 RLF3 VFP

Hydr 50 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP VFW

Hydr 51 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP -

Hydr 52

Hydr 53 FW DKP YFW DKP2 SLP AF RLF VF VF2 SF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 54 FW DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 RLF2 VFP

Hydr 55 FW YFW MK1 YK1 SLP AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 RLF2 VFP
MK1
YFW
YFW1
2+ Y Y
Y10 2+ Y 10 RLF Fault Fault Ext. Available Pump re-
Hydr 56 PRO YFW 10.2 10.2 VF1 VF2 RLF2 VF3 RLF3
1+ YFW 1 1 - 1 WT1 WT2 req. station quirment
2- + -
-

Hydr 57 FW SLP1 YFW ZKP SLP2 AF VF1 SF1 SF2 RLF RLF2 VFP

Hydr 58 HZ 1 SLP1 YFW ZKP SLP2 RLF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP RLFZ

57
58
1. TTE-FE 2. TTE-FE 3. TTE-FE
Function SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/
VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V
VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM
Hydr 41

Hydr 42
Basic settings

Hydr 43

Hydr 44

Hydr 45

Hydr 46 FW DKP2 x VF2

Hydr 47 FW DKP2 x VF2 YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF3

Hydr 48 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 49 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ Yk3- MK3 x VF3

Hydr 50 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ Yk3- MK3 x VF3

Hydr 51 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ Yk3- MK3 x VF3 YK4+ Yk4- MK4 x VF4

Hydr 52

Hydr 53 FW YK1+ YK1- MK1 x VF1

Hydr 54 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2

Hydr 55 FW YK2+ YK2- MK2 x VF2 YK3+ Yk3- MK3 x VF3

Hydr 56 PRO

Hydr 57 FW

Hydr 58 HZ 1

4 214 513 / 04
Hydraulics input/output table 59-61

TTE-FW
Function
DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 VE1 VE2 VE3* VE4 VE5* VE6 VE7 VE8 VE9 VE10 VA1 VA2 VA3 VA4 VA5 M-BUS

4 214 513 / 04
SLP2/ ZKP/
Hydr 59* HZ 1 SLP1 YFW ZKP SLP2 RLF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP RLFZ
0-10V 0-10V
Basic settings

SLP2/ ZKP/ VA5/


Hydr 60* HZ 1 SLP1 YFW ZKP SLP2 RLF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP RLFZ
0-10V 0-10V 0-10V

SLP1/ ZKP/
Hydr 61* HZ 1 SLP1 YFW Y11 ZKP RLF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP RLFZ FVT
0-10V 0-10V

1. TTE-FE 2. TTE-FE 3. TTE-FE


Function SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/ SK- VE3/ VA10V/
VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V VA1 VA2 VA3 VE1 VE2 VE10V
VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM VA3 IMP PWM
Hydr 60* HZ 1

Hydr 60* HZ 1

Hydr 61* HZ 1

*VE3 = Secondary return sensor


*VE5 = Primary flow sensor (optional)
* from hydr. 59 = speed control fitted in the pumps

59
60
Le ge nd:
AF Fresh air sensor RS485/OT H-Gen bus RS485 or OpenTherm VA10V Variable output 0-10V
AVF Plant f low sensor TTE-FE TopTronic E f unction expansion module VF1,2 Flow sensor 1.2
AVP Pump plant f low control TTE-WEZ TopTronic E heat generator module VE10V Variable input 0-10V
B1 Flow temperature controller AF Fresh air sensor VE1,2,3 Variable input 1,2,3
DKP Heating circuit pump direct heating circuit AVF Plant f low sensor VA,1,2,3 Variable output 1,2,3
H1 LED lamp output AVP Pump plant f low control WA,1,2 Heat request heat generator 1,2
HP,1,2 Main pump 1,2 B1 Flow temperature controller WF,1,2 Heat generator sensor 1,2
IMP Pulse counter DKP Heating circuit pump direct heating circuit Y7 DHW sw itchover element (= SLP output)
SF,1,2 Calorif ier sensor 1,2 H1 LED lamp output YK1,2 + Heating circuit mixer 1,2: open
Basic settings

SK-VA3 Saf ety chain variable output 3 HP,1,2 Main pump 1,2 YK1,2 - Heating circuit mixer 1,2: closed
SLP,1,2 DHW charging pump,1,2 IMP Pulse counter YKR+ Return mixer open
ST1 Stage 1 request (ext. H-Gen) SF,1,2 Calorif ier sensor 1.2 YKR- Return mixer closed
STB Saf ety temperature limiter SK-VA3 Saf ety chain variable output 3 YAV+ Plant f low - mixer open
MK1,2 Pump, mixer circuit 1,2 SLP,1,2 DHW charging pump, 1,2 YAV- Plant f low - mixer closed
RLF,1,2 Return sensor,1,2 ST1 Stage 1 request (ext. H-Gen) FVT FVT-T f low sensor temperature
LON-BUS LON-BUS TTE-FW TopTronic E district heating module/f resh w ater module
FVT FVT-F f low sensor f low
M-BUS M-BUS TTE-FW com TopTronic E district heating module/communicative 3V3 3.3V DC electrical pow er supply
WMZ Heat meter output

4 214 513 / 04
9.5 Function applications
Various function applications can be activated/set in the particular function (district heating (master), district heating head station, heating controller 1, etc.). Normal-
ly, there is no need to make settings for the function applications here because in most cases the correct function application will be preselected when the hydraulic
application is selected. In various cases, adjusting the function application allows fine-tuning or deactivation of a function.

4 214 513 / 04
In contrast to the “District heating (master)” function, the “District heading head station” function does not provide a total reference value for control purposes to the
TTE-FW router or the TopTronic supervisor instrumentation and control system.
Basic settings

Heating controllers 1 to 10 only differ with regard to their address on the bus group TTcom (previous generation). This has no influence on the CAN group.

Overview of function applications:


Function 0 1 2 .. 11 12
Gen. District heating District heating head Heating controller 1 Heating controller .. Heating controller 10 District heating
(master) station (slave 1) (slave ..) (slave 10)   multi-exchanger
system  
Designation TTE DH DH head st. TTE DH HZ1 TTE DH HZ.. TTE DH HZ10 FW-PRO

HK1 Direct heating circuit Direct heating circuit Mixed heating circuit Mixed heating circuit Mixed heating circuit Heat exchanger 1  

HK2 Mixed heating circuit Mixed heating circuit   Mixed heating circuit   Mixed heating circuit Mixed heating circuit Heat exchanger 2

HK3 Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Heat exchanger 3,
module expansion
HK4 Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Heat exchanger 3,
module expansion
HK5 Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion,
additional information
WW1 WW with charging WW with charging WW with charging WW with charging WW with charging Not active
pump SLP1 pump SLP1 pump SLP1 pump SLP1 pump SLP1
WW2 Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Not active

WW3 Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Not active

WW4 Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Module expansion Not active

61
Function modules and control functions

9.6 Information (reference/actual values, operating states)


In the “Information” menu, you can query the appropriate plant values such as reference/actual values, operating
states, etc. The information depth depends on the entered „user level“.

9.7 Adapting function name


In the Function name menu, it is possible to assign a freely definable name in addition to the standard name of each
function. This is then transferred to the operator level (e.g. for operating mode selection). Both names are displayed
in the parameter level.

Sample function name: Standard: “Heating circuit 1”


+ free name: „Ground floor“

10. Function modules and control functions


10.1 „General“ function group
In the “General” function, values must be set and settings made that are required for all function modules. Time, date,
input/output allocation as well as special sequence controls.
The hydraulic application is also set here.

62 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

10.1.1 Overview of menu structure “General”

General
(FunctionGroupName)

Function Operation
(FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup)

General
(FunctionName) Information 0-10V/PWM
General
(DefaultValue)

Function
Clock - date
name

Configuration Faults

Cleaning Relay test

Maintenance Sensors

Parameters IP config

Thermostat MBUS

Diff. control CAN-LON-


GW

Plant flow
CS info
contr

Sensor
balancing

Bootloader

Commis-
sioning

4 214 513 / 04 63
Function modules and control functions

10.1.2 Parameter overview „General“


General – information
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
21-101 AFG1 system outdoor sensor 1 0 °C 0.0 0.0 System outdoor sensor 1 (AFG1, from BUS) 0 7
21-103 Outside temp. day minimum -0.7 °C 0.0 0.0 Outside temp. daily minimum (AF1 or AFG1) 0 7
21-104 Outside temp. day maximum -0.3 °C 0.0 0.0 Outside temp. daily maximum (AF1 or AFG1) 0 7
00-000 AF1 - outdoor sensor 1 -0.5 °C 0.0 0.0 Outdoor sensor 1 (AF1, local HW input) 0 7
21-100 AF2 - outdoor sensor 2 0.0 0.0 Outdoor sensor 2 (AF2, local HW input) 0 7
21-102 AFG2 system outdoor sensor 2 0 °C 0.0 0.0 System outdoor sensor 2 (AFG2, from BUS) 3 7
00-106 Totals setpoint temperature xxx °C 0 100 Totals setpoint temperature, request primary valve 0 7
00-101 Return temperature primary xxx °C 0 120 Return temperature of transfer station (RLF) 0 7
00-102 Return temperature secondary xxx °C 0 100 Return temperature secondary side of transfer station (VE3) 0 7
00-103 Flow temperature secondary xxx °C 0 100 Flow temperature secondary side in transfer station (VF) 0 7
00-104 Flow temp. after mixer Xxx°C 0 100 Displays the flow temperature, depending on the hydraulic 2 7
application and function
00-105 Flow temperature primary xxx °C 0 120 Flow temperature primary side of transfer station (VE5) 0 7
00-114 Energy station xxxMWh -- -- Display heat quantity of transfer station 0 7
00-111 Output station xxxkW -- -- Display output of transfer station 0 7
00-112 Flow rate station Xxxl/h -- -- Display of flow rate of transfer station 0 7
00-113 Status of station -- -- -- Status display of transfer station 0 7
0=inactive
1=Cooling
2=Heating
00-098 Return limitation active xxx% 0 100 Display return limit of transfer station 0 7
0%=inactive
1% to 100%=active
00-099 Power limitation active xxx% 0 100 Display output limitation of transfer station 0 7
0%=inactive
1% to 100%=active
00-108 HC return curve xxx °C 0 100 Display of calculated return temperature heating 0 7
00-109 DHW return curve xxx °C 0 100 Display of calculated return temperature hot water mode 0 7
00-110 Valve setting station xxx% 0 100 Display valve setting of transfer station 0 7
00-096 Global controller control reduction xxx% 0 100 Information about commands that are sent using the TT 2 7
supervisor management system
00-097 Global controller control hot water xxx% 0 100 Information about commands that are sent using the TT 2 7
supervisor management system
01-099 Collective fault SMA -- -- -- Collective fault 0 7
00-095 External setpoint bus xxx °C -- -- External setpoint specification via RS 485, connection to TT 2 7
com controllers
22-002 THA1 thermostat 1 output 0 0 1 THA1 thermostat 1 output 2 7
21-012 THF1 actual thermostat sensor 1 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 THF1 actual thermostat sensor 1 2 7
22-003 THA2 thermostat 2 output 0 0 1 THA2 thermostat 2 output 2 7
21-013 THF2 actual thermostat sensor 2 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 THF2 actual thermostat sensor 2 2 7
22-004 THA3 thermostat 3 output 0 0 1 THA3 thermostat 3 output 2 7
21-014 THF3 actual thermostat sensor 3 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 THF3 actual thermostat sensor 3 2 7
22-005 DFA1 diff. control 1 output 0 0 1 DFA1 diff. control 1 output 2 7
21-015 DF1-1-actual diff. control 1 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DF1-1-actual diff. control 1 sensor 1 2 7
sensor 1
21-018 DF2-1-actual diff. control 1 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DF2-1-actual diff. control 1 sensor 2 2 7
sensor 2
22-006 DFA2 diff. control 2 output 0 0 1 DFA2 diff. control 2 output 2 7
21-016 DF1-2-actual diff. control 2 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DF1-2-actual diff. control 2 sensor 1 2 7
sensor 1
21-019 DF2-2-actual diff. control 2 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DF2-2-actual diff. control 2 sensor 2 2 7
sensor 2

64 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


22-007 DFA3 diff. control 3 output 0 0 1 DFA3 diff. control 3 output 2 7
21-017 DF1-3-actual diff. control 3 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DF1-2-actual diff. control 3 sensor 1 2 7
sensor 1
21-020 DF2-3-actual diff. control 3 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DF2-2-actual diff. control 3 sensor 2 2 7
sensor 2
22-021 FAV flow setpoint temp. 0 °C 0.0 0.0 Plant flow sensor set temp., plant flow control 2 7
21-059 Plant flow sensor actual temp. 27.8 °C 0.0 0.0 Plant flow sensor actual temp., plant flow control 2 7
22-055 AVP pump 0 0 1 AVP pump, plant flow control 2 7
22-056 YAV mixer 0% 0 1 YAV mixer, plant flow control 2 7
02-067 SU/WI display 0 0 1 Displays summer/winter operation 4 7
0 = Winter operation
1 = Summer operation
22-057 FTS output 0 0 1 Free time clock active/inactive 2 7
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
21-091 Setpoint incr./decr. status 11 0 0 Setpoint incr./decr. status 2 7
1x Increase undefined (input not allocated)
2x Increase inactive (input open)
3x Increase active (input closed)
x1 Reduction undefined (input not allocated)
x2 Reduction inactive (input open)
x3 Reduction active (input closed)
21-092 Buffer fill level 0% -- -- Displays the buffer fill level in multi-exchanger systems 2 2
(hydraulics 56)
21-093 Pressure 0kPa -- -- Displays the pressure in multi-exchanger systems (hydrau- 2 2
lics 56)
20-004 Software version 2.00.000 Software version display 0 7
00-115 Average return temperature 14,8 °C 0,0 0,0 Average return temperature 2 7

General – function name


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
04-005 Function name -- 0 20 Function name, see 9.7 0 3

General – configuration
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
04-077 Hydraulic application 30 0 55 Hydraulic application type, see 9.3 3 3
04-013 Alloc. AF1 as system outdoor 0 0 0 Define allocation outside temperature AF1 as system out-
sensor AFG1 side temperature AFG1 (BUS outdoor sensor)
04-076 Function application general FW 0 13 Function application type, see 9.5 3 3
30-035 Alloc. ext. fault signal input -- -- -- Allocation external fault signal input 3 3
0=Off, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3,
8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9
30-028 Alloc. AF1 - outdoor sensor 1 1=AF -- -- Allocation AF1 - outdoor sensor input 3 3
input 0=OFF 1= VA2, 2= DKP
30-029 Alloc. AF2 - outdoor sensor 2 0=OFF Allocation AF2 - outdoor sensor 2 input 3 3
input 0=OFF, 1=RLF, 2=VF, 3=VF1, 4=SF1, 5=SF2, 6=VE3,
7=VE4, 8=VE5, 9=VE6, 10=VE7, 11=VE8, 12=VE9
32-045 Alloc. SMA collective fault 0=OFF Allocation SMA collective fault output: 3 3
output 0=OFF, 1= VA2, 2= DKP
04-045 Commands No Perform command 5 5
action MBUS HW reset
Reset processor
Error unlocking
Factory reset (resets the device to factory settings)
01-201 Return temperature at -20° C 60°C 0 100 Specification of the permitted return temperature at -20°C 2 2
outdoor temperature. If the return temperature exceeds the
straight line defined by these values then the flow tempera-
ture is reduced.

4 214 513 / 04 65
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-202 Return temperature at +20° C 40°C 0 100 Specification of the permitted return temperature at +20°C 2 2
outdoor temperature. If the return temperature exceeds the
straight line defined by these values then the flow tempera-
ture is reduced.
01-203 Return temperature DHW at 50°C 0 100 Specification of the permitted return temperature of the 2 2
-20°C water heating at -20°C outside temperature. If the return
temperature exceeds the straight line defined by these val-
ues then the flow temperature is reduced. This parameter is
only active if this water heating has been activated.
01-204 Return temperature DHW at 60°C 0 100 Specification of the permitted return temperature of the 2 2
+20°C water heating at -20°C outside temperature. If the return
temperature exceeds the straight line defined by these val-
ues then the flow temperature is reduced. This parameter is
only active if this water heating has been activated.
01-205 Factor return limitation 10% 0 100 Specifies by how much a 100% temperature overshoot 2 2
reduces the flow temperature per calculation step (1 min)
01-206 Full nighttime reduction at -2°C -100 20 Permits a curtailment in the reduction when the outside tem- 2 2
outside temp perature is falling. This value changes the heating curves.
01-207 No nighttime reduction at -18°C -100 20 Permits a curtailment in the reduction when the outside tem- 2 2
outside temp perature is falling. This value changes the heating curves.
01-208 Maximum output 100kW 0 10000 Specification of the permitted heat use. If the momentary 2 2
consumption measured by the heat meter exceeds this
value, the set temperature and thus the flow temperature of
the secondary circuit are lowered.
01-209 Power limitation P-factor 10% 0 100 Specifies by how much a 100% power overshoot reduces 2 2
the flow temperature per calculation step.
01-212 Max. primary flow temp. after 90°C 0°C 140°C Setting possibility of the maximum flow temperature, depen- 5 5
mixer ding on the hydraulic application and function
01-213 Message set/actual deviation 10K 0 140 Setting possibility of the deviation magnitude. If parame- 2 2
ter is active and the deviation of the secondary set/actual
temperature is above the set delay time then a fault is
generated.
01-214 Message set/actual+return 60min 0 600 When a set/actual value or return temperature deviation is 2 2
delay triggered, this parameter enables the delay time to be set.
After the set time has elapsed, the fault is generated.
01-249 Alloc. outp. booster pump 0 0 24 Allocation of the output of a booster pump 4 4
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1auf, 6=YK1zu, 7=SLP1 8=SLP2, 9=VA2
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
01-250 VE5 as Pri FL sensor 1 0 1 Setting possibility for the activation/deactivation of a pri- 4 4
mary-sided VE5 flow sensor.
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
30-054 Alloc. setpoint increase input 0 0 31 Allocation setpoint increase input 3 3
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-
FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-
FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-055 Alloc. setpoint reduction input 0 0 31 Allocation setpoint reduction input 3 3
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-
FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-
FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4

66 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


32-022 Alloc. free time cl. output Allocation free time cl. output
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
01-251 Alloc. input select return curve 0 0 31 External switchover to return curve DHW
DHW 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-056 Alloc. inp. pressure sensor 0 0 9 Allocation input pressure sensor
0=OFF, 1=VE1, 2=VE2, 3=VE8, 4=VE9, 5=VE10V-FE1,
6=VE10V-FE2, 7=VE10V-FE3, 8=VE10V-FE4, 9=VE10V-
FE5

General – cleaning
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
21-054 Confirmation 0 Using the Acknowledge parameter, the value: 0 0
7 acknowledges the maintenance
8 acknowledges the cleaning
21 error unlocking

General – maintenance
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
20-034 Maintenance configuration 0 0 2 Maintenance configuration 2 2
0: No display maintenance
1: Display maintenance on set date
2: Display maintenance according to interval
20-035 Date of next maintenance 2014-05- 41639 65379 The message is generated at the end of the set day. If the 2 2
message 14 message is acknowledged, the event only reoccurs if a
date is set after the current date.
20-036 Next maintenance interval 730 days 1 1825 The message is generated if the interval has expired (end 2 2
of the day). The interval is restarted after the message has
been acknowledged.
20-037 Maint. count value message 0 100 99900 The maintenance counter is formed from the total of 2 2
maint. operating hours
21-057 Date of next maintenance 2000-01- -- -- Date setting for the next maintenance 0 7
01
21-058 Remaining run time Xxx days -- -- Display remaining run time of maintenance counter 0 7
maintenance counter
04-099 Tel. no. customer service -- -- -- Display customer service telephone number 3 3
21-054 Acknowledgement 0 Using the Acknowledge parameter, the value: 0 0
7 acknowledges the maintenance
8 acknowledges the cleaning
21 error unlocking

General – parameters
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
04-017 Collective fault output delay 1.0 min 0.0 60.0 Delay time trigger collective fault output 3 3
04-018 Delay input external alarm 0.2 min 0.0 30.0 Delay time trigger input external alarm message 3 3
message
04-078 Application selection ban -- -- -- The application type selection and hydraulic selection can 6 6
be blocked using the manufacturer code with parameter
04-078. If the parameter is set to on, the block is in effect.
Function application types and hydraulic application cannot
be adjusted any longer.
04-126 System image -- -- -- System image (module overview) 6 6

4 214 513 / 04 67
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


04-019 Local time change 1 0 1 Activates/deactivates the automatic summer/winter time 3 3
change.
0 = Deactivated
1= Activated
04-020 AF-RLF inactive 0 3 -- This parameter enables the function of the outdoor sensor 3 3
or the return sensor to be configured in DHW systems
or heating regulators. However, an outdoor sensor must
always be installed for controlling heating circuits.
Inactive = The controller is configured as a district heating
controller and the outdoor sensor and the return sensor
must be installed.
If the controller is configured as a heating controller and if
a release sensor is required for DHW systems with service
water pump SLP2 then the return sensor can be used for
this.
If there is no release sensor, the service water pump SLP2
is switched on in parallel with the charging pump SLP1
although a sensor break is displayed.
0 = Deactivated
1 = The controller is configured as a heating controller and
there is no outdoor sensor. The frost protection for the DHW
tank is monitored by means of the current tank temperature.

2 = The controller is configured as a heating controller and


there is no return sensor installed.

3 = The controller is configured as a heating controller


and there is no outdoor sensor or return sensor. The frost
protection for the DHW tank is monitored by means of the
current tank temperature.
04-021 Activate alarm relay 1 0 3 Activates/deactivates the alarm relay 3 3
0 = Deactivated
1= Activated for messages (incl. return limitation)
2= Activated only faults
3= Activated only temperature undershoot station
04-022 Function RT limit 2 1 2 This parameter enables function of the return limitation to 3 3
be configured.
1 = primary valve only, the return limitation only affects the
primary valve, the control circuits are not lowered
2 = standard, the return limit also affects the control circuits
04-023 Follow-on circuit mode 0 0 5 This parameter determines the switching behaviour of the 3 3
plant for multi-exchanger plants (hydraulics 56).
0 = Parallel operation
1 = Switching 1x per week (Thursday 12:00)
2 = Result T1 leading
3 = Result T2 leading
4=Sequence T3 leading
5=Sequence T4 leading
04-024 Connection TO 5min 0,1 120 Delay time for exchanger connection in multi-exchanger 3 3
plants (hydraulics 56). For this time, a flow temperature
must be below the setpoint temperature so that another
exchanger is requested.
04-025 Connection difference 2K 0,5 20 If the flow temperature in multi-exchanger plants (hydraulics 3 3
56) is below the setpoint temperature by this value, another
exchanger is requested in a time-delayed manner (04-024).
04-026 Switching back with 2HE 60% 1 100 Switching back in multi-exchanger plants with two exch- 3 3
angers (hydraulics 56). If the average valve opening with
two active exchangers is below this value, the number of
exchangers is reduced.
04-027 Switching back with 4HE 20% 1 100 Switching back in multi-exchanger plants with more than 3 3
two exchangers. If the average valve opening with four
active exchangers is below this value, the number of exch-
angers is reduced.
04-028 Switching back TO 5min 0,1 120 Time delay for multi-exchanger plants (hydraulics 56) 3 3
Parameter 04-026/04-027
04-029 Delay damper 0,5min 0 20 Delay time for the first damper in multi-exchanger plants 3 3
(hydraulics 56). The pumps is released in a time-delayed
manner when the first damper is opening.

68 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


04-030 Time cons. for return temp. AV 24h 0 100 Time cons. for return temp. Av. calc. (DAP 00-115) 3 3
calc.
04-031 Offset total requirement 0K -50 50 The total of the setpoint temperatures is shifted by this 3 5
valuen
04-032 Area pressure sensor 0kPa 0 10000 Pressure sensor measuring range.
04-033 Underpressure message 0kPa 0 10000 Threshold for alarm message.
04-034 Underpressure message del. 0,0min 0 120 Delay for alarm message. With value “0” the check is
deactivated.

General – thermostat
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
32-028 Alloc. THA1 - thermostat 1 output 0=OFF Allocation output THA1 - thermostat 1: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4 24=VA3-FE4
30-036 Alloc. THF1 - thermostat sensor 0=OFF Allocation input THF1 - thermostat sensor 1: 3 3
1 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
29-060 THF1 ref. thermostat sensor 1 0 °C -20.0 250.0 THF1 ref. thermostat sensor 1 3 3
29-063 Thermostat 1 switching difference 3K 1.0 90.0 Thermostat 1 switching difference 3 3
32-029 Alloc. THA2 - thermostat 2 output 0=OFF Allocation output THA2 - thermostat 2: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
30-037 Alloc. THF2 - thermostat sensor 0=OFF Allocation input THF2 - thermostat sensor 2: 3 3
2 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
29-061 THF2 ref. thermostat sensor 2 0 °C -20.0 250.0 THF2 ref. thermostat sensor 2 3 3
29-064 Thermostat 2 switching difference 3K 1.0 90.0 Thermostat 2 switching difference 3 3
32-030 Alloc. THA3 - thermostat 3 output 0=OFF Allocation output THA3 - thermostat 3: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
30-038 Alloc. THF3 - thermostat sensor 3 0=OFF Allocation input THF3 - thermostat sensor 3: 3 3
input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
29-062 THF3 ref. thermostat sensor 3 0 °C -20.0 250.0 THF3 ref. thermostat sensor 3 3 3
29-065 Thermostat 3 switching difference 3K 1.0 90.0 Thermostat 3 switching difference 3 3

4 214 513 / 04 69
Function modules and control functions

General – differential control


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
32-041 Alloc. DFA1 - diff. ctrl 1 output 0=OFF Allocation output DFA1 - diff. control 1: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
30-039 Alloc. DF1-1 - diff. ctrl 1 sensor 0=OFF Allocation input DF1-1 - diff. control 1 sensor 1: 3 3
1 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-042 Alloc. DF2-1 - diff. ctrl 1 sensor 0=OFF Allocation input DF2-1 - diff. control 1 sensor 2: 3 3
2 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
29-066 Diff. control 1 sw-on diff. 8K 1.0 90.0 Diff. control 1 sw-on diff. 3 3
29-069 Diff. control 1 switch-off diff. 4K 1.0 90.0 Diff. control 1 switch-off diff. 3 3
29-072 Diff. control 1 min. temp. 10 °C 10.0 100.0 Diff. control 1 min. temp. 3 3
29-075 Diff. control 1 max. temp. 90 °C 10.0 100.0 Diff. control 1 max. temp. 3 3
32-042 Alloc. DFA2 - diff. ctrl 2 output 0=OFF Allocation output DFA2 - diff. control 2: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
30-040 Alloc. DF1-2 - diff. ctrl 2 sensor 0=OFF Allocation input DF1-2 - diff. control 2 sensor 1: 3 3
1 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-043 Alloc. DF2-2 - diff. ctrl 2 sensor 0=OFF Allocation input DF2-2 - diff. control 2 sensor 2: 3 3
2 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
29-067 Diff. control 2 sw-on diff. 8K 1.0 90.0 Diff. control 2 sw-on diff. 3 3
29-070 Diff. control 2 switch-off diff. 4K 1.0 90.0 Diff. control 2 switch-off diff. 3 3
29-073 Diff. control 2 min. temp. 10 °C 10.0 100.0 Diff. control 2 min. temp. 3 3
29-076 Diff. control 2 max. temp. 90 °C 10.0 100.0 Diff. control 2 max. temp. 3 3
32-043 Alloc. DFA3 - diff. ctrl 3 output 0=OFF Allocation output DFA3 - diff. control 3: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
10=VA3, 11=VA4, 12=VA5, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1,
15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2,
19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4,
23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4

70 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


30-041 Alloc. DF1-3 - diff. ctrl 3 sensor 0=OFF Allocation input DF1-3 - diff. control 3 sensor 1: 3 3
1 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-044 Alloc. DF2-3 - diff. ctrl 3 sensor 0=OFF Allocation input DF2-3 - diff. control 3 sensor 2: 3 3
2 input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
29-068 Diff. control 3 sw-on diff. 8K 1.0 90.0 Diff. control 3 sw-on diff. 3 3
29-071 Diff. control 3 switch-off diff. 4K 1.0 90.0 Diff. control 3 switch-off diff. 3 3
29-074 Diff. control 3 min. temp. 10 °C 10.0 100.0 Diff. control 3 min. temp. 3 3
29-077 Diff. control 3 max. temp. 90 °C 10.0 100.0 Diff. control 3 max. temp. 3 3

General – plant flow control


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
06-060 Type plant flow control PFC 0 0 2 Plant flow control type 3 3
0=Plant flow control
30-007 Alloc. inp. FAV – plant flow 0=OFF Allocation input plant flow sensor 3 3
sensor 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
32-025 Alloc. AVP pump output 0=OFF Allocation output AVP pump: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
32-026 Alloc. YAV mixer output-OPEN 0=OFF Allocation output YAV-OPEN: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
32-027 Alloc. YAV mixer output-CLOSED 0=OFF Allocation output YAV-CLOSED: 3 3
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
06-061 Minimum temp. AVR 20 °C 5.0 110.0 If there is a plant flow control reference value, the minimum 4 4
temperature acts as the lower limit for the reference value.
06-062 Maximum temp. AVR 90 °C 2.0 110.0 If there is a plant flow control reference value, the maximum 4 4
temperature acts as the upper limit for the reference value.
06-063 Plant flow control offset 0K -50.0 70.0 An offset can be applied to the plant flow control reference 4 4
value. (supplement/reduction)
06-064 Plant flow control proportional 40 K 5,0 10000 Parameter for the proportional portion of the mixer control 4 4
range for the specified heating circuit. The P-band is that tempe-
rature change that should have a full deflection (= 100% run
time) on the mixer.
06-068 Plant flow control adjusting time 40sec 1 10000 Plant flow control calculation time 4 4

4 214 513 / 04 71
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


06-069 Plant flow control calculation time 60sec 1 10000 Run time of the mixer control loop. Example: The run time 4 4
of the motor is 120 seconds. The set value 30 is then ¼ of
the entire run time, which means the calculation is perfor-
med every 30 seconds. The set value should usually be ¼
of the total run time in all cases.
06-065 Follow-on time AVP pump 5 min 0,5 99,0 In post operation, the pump remains switched on and the 4 4
mixer continues to be controlled with the last setpoint. Fol-
lowing post operation, the pump is switched off, the mixer is
closed during the double mixer runtime.
06-066 YAV mixer run time 120 sec 0,0 6000,0 Run time of the valve in seconds. The run time for the valve 4 4
calculation must be set exactly.

General – 0-10V/PWM
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
33-099 Configuration 0-10V/0/4)-20mA 1 1 2 Configuration VA1 #1: 0-10V/0-20mA#2: 2-10V/4-20mA 4 4
/ VA1
33-100 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 0 0 3 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 1 4 4
1 / VA3 0: Off
1: 0-10V
2: 0-10V inverted
3: PWM (0%=0V)
4: PWM inverted (0%=10V)
20-038 Characteristic curve 1 (X1) 0 %/°C 0.0 100.0 4 4
20-039 Characteristic curve 1 vltg. (Y1) 0V 0.0 10.0 4 4
at X1
20-040 Characteristic curve 1 (X2) 100 %/°C 0.0 100.0 4 4
20-041 Characteristic curve 1 vltg. (Y2) 10 V 0.0 10.0 4 4
at X2
20-054 Char. curve 1 switch-off voltage 0V 0.0 10.0 5 5
33-101 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 0 0 3 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 2 4 4
2 / VA4 0: Off
1: 0-10V
2: 0-10V inverted
3: PWM (0%=0V)
4: PWM inverted (0%=10V)

20-042 Characteristic curve 2 (X1) 0 %/°C 0.0 100.0 4 4


20-043 Characteristic curve 2 vltg. (Y1) 0V 0.0 10.0 4 4
at X1
20-044 Characteristic curve 2 (X2) 100 %/°C 0.0 100.0 4 4
20-045 Characteristic curve 2 vltg. (Y2) 10 V 0.0 10.0 4 4
at X2
20-055 Char. curve 2 switch-off voltage 0V 0.0 10.0 5 5
33-102 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 0 0 3 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 3 4 4
3 / VA5 0: Off
1: 0-10V
2: 0-10V inverted
3: PWM (0%=0V)
4: PWM inverted (0%=10V)

20-046 Characteristic curve 3 (X1) 0 %/°C 0.0 100.0 5 5


20-047 Characteristic curve 3 vltg. (Y1) 0V 0.0 10.0 5 5
at X1
20-048 Characteristic curve 3 (X2) 100 %/°C 0.0 100.0 5 5
20-049 Characteristic curve 3 vltg. (Y2) 10 V 0.0 10.0 5 5
at X2
20-056 Char. curve 3 switch-off voltage 0V 0.0 10.0 5 5

72 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

General – Clock-date
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
02-070 Date 2014-10- 0 65379 0 0
25
02-072 Time of day 13:15 0 1439 0 0
02-073 Weekday Saturday 0 0 0 7
20-124 Time_UTC Timestamp in seconds 0 0

General – faults
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
29-042 Active error 1 xxx 0 0 0 7
29-043 Active error 2 xxx 0 0 0 7
29-044 Active error 3 xxx 0 0 0 7
29-045 Active error 4 xxx 0 0 0 7
29-046 Active error 5 xxx 0 0 0 7
29-040 Error memory 0 0 4 7
29-041 Error to be transferred xxx 0 0 0 0

General – Relay test


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
23-084 Activate relay test 0 0 1 Activate relay test 3 3
0=OFF
1=ON
21-031 DKP HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-032 YFW+ HW output 0 0 2 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
2=test setting minimum valve stroke activation
21-033 YFW- HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-034 MC1 HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-035 YK1+ HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-036 YK1- HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-037 SLP1 HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-038 SLP2 HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-039 VA2 HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-040 VA1 0-10V/0-20mA HW output 0% 0 100 Status output / activation 0=100% (5% steps, 3 3
0-10V output must be configured)
21-041 VA3 0-10V/PWM HW output 0% 0 100 Status output / activation 0=100% (5% steps, 3 3
0-10V output must be configured)
21-042 VA4 0-10V/PWM HW output 0% 0 100 Status output / activation 0=100% (5% steps, 3 3
0-10V output must be configured)
21-043 VA5 0-10V/PWM HW output 0% 0 100 Status output / activation 0=100% (5% steps, 3 3
0-10V output must be configured)
21-044 Activate TTE-FE relay test 0 0 5 Activate relay test 3 3
0=OFF
1=FE module 1, 2=FE module 2, 3=FE module 3, 4=FE
module 4, 5=FE module 5
21-045 FE-VA1 HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-046 FE-VA2 HW output 0 0 1 Status output / activation 0=OFF 1=ON 3 3
21-047 FE-VA3 HW output 0 0 1 FE-VA3 HW output 3 3
21-048 FE-VA10V/PWM HW output 0% 0 100 Status output / activation 0-100% (5% steps, 3 3
0-10V output must be configured)

4 214 513 / 04 73
Function modules and control functions

General – Sensors
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
33-000 Type of sensor 2=PT1000 This setting applies to the control TTE FW (com) and 3 3
all expansion modules that are connected via the internal
device bus.
0=KTY
1=PTC
2=PT1000
33-001 VE1 function inactive 0 3 0=inactive 3 3
1=Volt-free
2=0-10V
3=4-20mA
33-002 VE2 function inactive 0 3 0=inactive 3 3
1=Volt-free
2=0-10V
3=4-20mA
4 = DHW charge interruption
The function 4 can, for example, be used for the deactiva-
tion of the pump release functions (SLP2) in an emergency
or manual domestic hot water operation. Contact open is
normal operation.
33-003 VE8 input type Inactive 0 2 0=Temperature 3 3
1=Volt-free
2=0-10V
33-004 VE9 input type Inactive 0 2 0=Temperature 3 3
1=Volt-free
2=0-10V
20-070 Vol. flow pulse gen pulse rate 0/l 0 5000,0 Entry of the pulse rate in pulses/litre 3 3
VE10/IMP
20-080 Volume flow pulse gen. offset 0l/min -10,00 10,00 Offset flow sensor, is added to the measured value to obtain 3 3
VE10/IMP the finished measured value. (litres/minute)
20-071 Vol. flw pls gen pls rate (VE3/ 0/l 0 5000,0 Entry of the pulse rate in pulses/litre 3 3
IMP-FE1)
20-081 Vol. flow pulse gen.offset 0l/min -10,00 10,00 Offset flow sensor, is added to the measured value to obtain 3 3
(VE3/IMP-FE1) the finished measured value. (litres/minute)
20-072 Vol. flw pls gen pls rate (VE3/ 0/l 0 5000,0 Entry of the pulse rate in pulses/litre 3 3
IMP FE2)
20-082 Vol. flow pulse gen.offset 0l/min -10,00 10,00 Offset flow sensor, is added to the measured value to obtain 3 3
(VE3/IMP FE2) the finished measured value. (litres/minute)
20-073 Vol. flw pls gen pls rate (VE3/ 0/l 0 5000,0 Entry of the pulse rate in pulses/litre 3 3
IMP FE3)
20-083 Vol. flow pulse gen.offset 0l/min -10,00 10,00 Offset flow sensor, is added to the measured value to obtain 3 3
(VE3/IMP FE3) the finished measured value. (litres/minute)
20-074 Vol. flw pls gen pls rate (VE3/ 0/l 0 5000,0 Entry of the pulse rate in pulses/litre 3 3
IMP FE4)
20-084 Vol. flow pulse gen.offset 0l/min -10,00 10,00 Offset flow sensor, is added to the measured value to obtain 3 3
(VE3/IMP FE4) the finished measured value. (litres/minute)
20-075 Vol. flw pls gen pls rate (VE3/ 0/l 0 5000,0 Entry of the pulse rate in pulses/litre 3 3
IMP FE5)
20-085 Vol. flow pulse gen.offset 0l/min -10,00 10,00 Offset flow sensor, is added to the measured value to obtain 3 3
(VE3/IMP FE5) the finished measured value. (litres/minute)

74 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

10.1.3 IP config
Used for commissioning and setting the IP address for the “Ethernet connection TopTronic® E district heating com”
communication interface. First, the TopTronic® com controller must be deenergised. The LAN I-O interface on the
TopTronic® E FW com must be connected with the cable provided. Following that, both units are switched on and an
initialisation is performed. Following successful initialisation, the IP address input is authorised.

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-343 Module A/B DHCP 0 0 1 For setting the communication module TCP/IP 4 4
01-344 Module A/B IP 000.000.000.000 -- -- IP address for the communication module 4 4
01-345 Module A/B subnet 255255255000 -- -- Subnet settings 4 4
01-346 Module A/B gateway 000.000.000.000 -- -- Gateway settings 4 4
01-347 Module A/B server 000.000.000.000 -- -- IP address setting of the server 4 4
01-348 Apply changes 0 0 1 1=The set changes are accepted - only to be used for 4 4
Toptronic Supervisor

10.1.4 M-BUS
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
01-600 MBUS battery grip 15 min 15 48 Adjustable readout cycle in battery meter 3 3
min hours
01-601 MBUS 1 Universal -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
MBUS Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-602 MBUS 1 address 1 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-603 MBUS 1 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-604 MBUS 1 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-605 MBUS 1 power calculation Yes -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-606 MBUS 2 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-607 MBUS 2 address 2 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-608 MBUS 2 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-609 MBUS 2 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-610 MBUS 2 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-611 MBUS 3 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-612 MBUS 3 address 3 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.

4 214 513 / 04 75
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-613 MBUS 3 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-614 MBUS 3 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-615 MBUS 3 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-616 MBUS 4 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-617 MBUS 4 address 4 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-618 MBUS 4 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-619 MBUS 4 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-620 MBUS 4 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-621 MBUS 5 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-622 MBUS 5 address 5 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-623 MBUS 5 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-624 MBUS 5 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-625 MBUS 5 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-626 MBUS 6 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-627 MBUS 6 address 6 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-628 MBUS 6 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-629 MBUS 6 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-630 MBUS 6 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.

76 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-631 MBUS 7 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-632 MBUS 7 address 7 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-633 MBUS 7 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-634 MBUS 7 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-635 MBUS 7 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-636 MBUS 8 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-637 MBUS 8 address 8 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-638 MBUS 8 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-639 MBUS 8 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-640 MBUS 8 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-641 MBUS 9 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-642 MBUS 9 address 9 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-643 MBUS 9 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-644 MBUS 9 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-645 MBUS 9 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-646 MBUS 10 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-647 MBUS 10 address 10 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-648 MBUS 10 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-649 MBUS 10 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-650 MBUS 10 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.

4 214 513 / 04 77
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-651 MBUS 11 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-652 MBUS 11 address 11 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-653 MBUS 11 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-654 MBUS 11 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-655 MBUS 11 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-656 MBUS 12 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-657 MBUS 12 address 12 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-658 MBUS 12 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-659 MBUS 12 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-660 MBUS 12 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-661 MBUS 13 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-662 MBUS 13 address 13 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-663 MBUS 13 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-664 MBUS 13 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-665 MBUS 13 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-666 MBUS 14 inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-667 MBUS 14 address 14 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-668 MBUS 14 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-669 MBUS 14 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-670 MBUS 14 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.

78 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-671 MBUS 15 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-672 MBUS 15 address 15 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-673 MBUS 15 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-674 MBUS 15 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-675 MBUS 15 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.
01-676 MBUS 16 Inactive -- -- Setting possibility of the meter type: 3 3
Inactive: No unit is connected
Universal M-bus: Heat, cold and electricity meter
Sontex: Neovac Supercal 531, Superstatic 749

Compatible meters and data points are represented in the


M-bus meter overview
01-677 MBUS 16 address 15 0 255 Setting possibility of the M-bus address. The M-bus 3 3
address can generally be read off from the unit.
01-678 MBUS 16 baud rate 300 300 2400 Setting possibility of the baud rate. Different meter brands 3 3
have different communication baud rates. This parameter
allows adaptation to the particular brand
01-679 MBUS 16 battery operation No -- -- Setting possibility battery readout 3 3
01-680 MBUS 16 power calculation No -- -- The power calculation can be activated with this parameter. 3 3
All M-bus meters that are activated have a direct influence
on the power limitation.

4 214 513 / 04 79
Function modules and control functions

10.1.5 M-BUS meter overview

Danfoss EEM-C manufacturer ID: KAM v0x01

Kamstrup ultrakon EWZ 810 manufactu-

Kamstrup Multical 602 incl. pulse modu-

AQUA Metro Calec energy Master v0xD2


Siemens UH50-A22C-AT06-F 0x04
Kamstrup Multical Compact v0x01
Hydrometer Sharky 773 v0x2E
Hydrometer Sharky 775 v0x2F

(Must be set to “Sontex” under

(Must be set to “Sontex” under

Engelmann SensoStar2 v0x00


Kamstrup Multical 66C v0x01

Kamstrup Multical 402 v0x0B


Kamstrup Multical 401 v0x01

Kamstrup Multical 601 v0x01

Sontex Neovac Supercal531

Sontex Neovac Supercal531


configuration) v0x19

configuration v0x0E

Amtron Sonic D15


rer ID:KAM v0x01

le v0x0F
Parameters Designation
00-000 Current energy X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-001 Current power X X X X X x X X X X X X X X
00-002 Current flow rate X X X X X x X X X X X X X X
00-003 Current volume X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-004 Current flow temperature X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-005 Current return temperature X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-006 Current differential temperature X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-007 Serial number X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X
00-008 Fault message/M-bus status byte X X X x X X X X X
00-009 Manufacturer X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X
00-010 Sort X X X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-011 Current
00-012 Voltage
00-013 Cos phi
00-014 Current tariff register 1 X X X
00-015 Current tariff register 2 X X
00-016 Current date X X x X X X X X X X
00-017 Current time X X x X X X X X X X
00-018 Energy key date 1 X X X X
00-019 Volume 1 X X X X X X X
00-020 Tariff register 1 / S1 X X
00-021 Tariff register 2 / S1 X X
00-022 Date 1 X X X X X X
00-023 Date future key date 1 X
00-024 Energy key date 2 X X
00-025 Volume 2 X X
00-026 Tariff register 1 / S2 X X
00-027 Tariff register 2 / S2 X X
00-028 Date 2 X X X
00-029 Date future key date 2 X
00-030 Current pulse input meter 1
00-031 Current pulse input meter 2
00-032 version X X X X x X X X X X X X X X
00-033 Operating days x x x x x x x x x x x x
00-050 Current energy cold X
00-051 Current output cold x
00-100 Current power W
00-101 Current reactive power
00-102 Current apparent power
00-103 Current mains frequency
00-104 Current volume ltr
00-105 Current energy kWh

80 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

10.1.6 CAN-LON gateway


This function enables data points that are available from various units (solar, buffer, etc.) on the CAN-BUS to be trans-
ferred to the TopTronic supervisor management system via the LON-BUS or TCP/IP network.
50 configurable data points are available per controller, and can be allocated depending on the version of the plant.
In principle, all available data points can be read. However, only the commissioning parameters and the operating
mode switching are writable!

Par. Designation Value Comments Type Decimal R W


01-293 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 1 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP1 – Exception see
Hydraulics 61
01-294 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 2 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP2 – Exception see
Hydraulics 61
01-295 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 3 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP3
01-296 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 4 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP4
00-297 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 5 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP5
00-298 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 6 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP6
00-299 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 7 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP7
00-300 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 8 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP8
00-301 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 9 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP9
00-302 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 10 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP10
00-303 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 11 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP11
00-304 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 12 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP12
00-305 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 13 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP13
00-306 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 14 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP14
00-307 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 15 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP15
00-308 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 16 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP16
00-309 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 17 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP17
01-310 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 18 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP18
01-311 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 19 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP19
01-312 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 20 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP20
01-313 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 21 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP21

4 214 513 / 04 81
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Comments Type Decimal R W


00-314 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 22 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP22
00-315 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 23 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP23
00-316 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 24 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP24
00-317 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 25 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP25
00-318 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 26 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP26
00-319 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 27 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP27
00-320 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 28 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP28
00-321 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 29 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP29
00-322 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 30 S8,U8,S16,U16 1 4 4
Gateway DP30
00-323 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 31 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP31
00-324 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 32 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP32
00-325 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 33 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP33
00-326 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 34 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP34
00-327 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 35 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP35
01-328 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 36 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP36
01-329 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 37 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP37
00-330 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 38 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP38
00-331 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 39 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP39
00-332 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 40 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP40
00-333 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 41 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP41
00-334 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 42 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP42
00-335 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 43 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP43
00-336 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 44 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP44
00-337 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 45 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP45
00-338 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 46 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP46

82 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Comments Type Decimal R W


00-339 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 47 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP47
00-340 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 48 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP48
00-341 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 49 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP49
00-342 CAN-LON- 0000.000.000.00000 Data point 50 U32 0 4 4
Gateway DP50

To transfer a temperature, data points 1 to 30, for example, can be used with types S8, U8, S16, U16 and a decimal
place. Data points 31 to 50 with type U32 are available for energy data.

Address overview:
Module DIP switch CAN address Subscriber address
TTE WEZ 1 1
TTE WEZ 2 2
TTE WEZ 3 3
TTE WEZ 4 4
TTE WEZ 5 5
TTE WEZ 6 6
TTE WEZ 7 7
TTE WEZ 8 8
TTE WEZ 9 9
TTE WEZ 10 10
TTE WEZ 11 11
TTE WEZ 12 12
TTE WEZ 13 13
TTE WEZ 14 14
TTE WEZ 15 15
TTE WEZ 16 16
TTE SOL 1 65
TTE SOL 2 66
TTE SOL 3 67
TTE SOL 4 68
TTE SOL 5 69
TTE SOL 6 70
TTE SOL 7 71
TTE SOL 8 72
TTE SOL 9 73
TTE SOL 10 74
TTE SOL 11 75
TTE SOL 12 76
TTE SOL 13 77
TTE SOL 14 78
TTE SOL 15 79
TTE SOL 16 80
TTE PS 1 129

4 214 513 / 04 83
Function modules and control functions

Module DIP switch CAN address Subscriber address


TTE PS 2 130
TTE PS 3 131
TTE PS 4 132
TTE PS 5 133
TTE PS 6 134
TTE PS 7 135
TTE PS 8 136
TTE PS 9 137
TTE PS 10 138
TTE PS 11 139
TTE PS 12 140
TTE PS 13 141
TTE PS 14 142
TTE PS 15 143
TTE PS 16 144
TTE HK/WW 1 257
TTE HK/WW 2 258
TTE HK/WW 3 259
TTE HK/WW 4 260
TTE HK/WW 5 261
TTE HK/WW 6 262
TTE HK/WW 7 263
TTE HK/WW 8 264
TTE HK/WW 9 265
TTE HK/WW 10 266
TTE HK/WW 11 267
TTE HK/WW 12 268
TTE HK/WW 13 269
TTE HK/WW 14 270
TTE HK/WW 15 271
TTE HK/WW 16 272
TTE MWA 1 385
TTE MWA 2 386
TTE MWA 3 387
TTE MWA 4 388
TTE MWA 5 389
TTE MWA 6 390
TTE MWA 7 391
TTE MWA 8 392
TTE MWA 9 393
TTE MWA 10 394
TTE MWA 11 395
TTE MWA 12 396
TTE MWA 13 397
TTE MWA 14 398
TTE MWA 15 399
TTE MWA 16 400

84 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Address input:
The addresses of the various data points can be parameterised on TTE district heating module com.

The complete address is composed of the subscriber address, FunctionGroup, FunctionNumber, DatapointID.
This information can be read-out on the operating module or in the csv file that are also used for the line recorder.

Example:
Subscriber address FunctionGroup FunctionNumber DatapointID
0080 023 000 00016

Example with solar module:

Solar module CAN address 16 (input value 0080), solar storage tank (input value 023) solar storage tank 1 (input value
000) temperature “TU storage tank bottom temp.” (input value 00016=data point ID).

FunctionGroup (Input value 023)

4 214 513 / 04 85
Function modules and control functions

FunctionNumber (Input value 000)

DatapointID (Input value 00016)

86 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Comments


01-293 CAN-LON-Gateway DP1 0080.023.000.00016 Data point 1 (TU storage tank bottom temp.)

Example with buffer module:

Buffer module CAN address 15 (value 0143), buffer (value 021), buffer (value 000), temperature “Buffer PF/KPF2
actual” (Value 00015=data point ID).

Par. Designation Value Comments


01-294 CAN-LON-Gateway DP2 0143.021.000.00015 Data point 2 (Buffer PF/KPF2 actual)

10.1.7 Service info (customer service information)


The customer service information display is only intended for the works customer service, and is only enabled with the
authorisation from them.

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-349 Event memory index -- 0 3500 Display of the event memory index 4 4
01-350 Event memory DateTime -- 0 -- Display date and time 4 7
01-351 Event memory ID -- 0 -- Display what was changed 4 7
01-352 Event memory value -- 0 -- Display the value that was changed 4 7
00-120 CAN current consumption -- 0 -- Display of the current consumption of the units connected 3 7
to the controller
00-121 MBus quiescent current -- 0 -- Display of the current consumption of the connected M-Bus 3 7
interfaces. The display can have a time delay of up to one
minute.
00-122 Internal info index -- 0 -- Internal info 4 7
00-123 Internal info -- 0 -- Internal info 4 7
00-124 VA1 -- 0 -- Display of the output value on output VA1 0 7
00-125 VA3 -- 0 -- Display of the output value on output VA3 0 7
00-126 VA4 -- 0 -- Display of the output value on output VA4 0 7
00-127 VA5 -- 0 -- Display of the output value on output VA5 0 7
00-128 VE1 -- 0 -- Value display of the input VE1 0 7
00-129 VE2 -- 0 -- Value display of the input VE2 0 7
00-130 VE8 -- 0 -- Value display of the 0-10V input VE8 in % 0 7
00-131 VE9 -- 0 -- Value display of the 0-10V input VE9 in % 0 7
00-132 Operating hours -- 0 -- Operating hours counter, the counter cannot be reset! 4 7
04-090 Unit identification -- -- -- 0 7
04-092 SW version -- -- -- SW version of the unit 0 7
04-093 HW version -- -- -- HW version of the unit 0 7
04-094 SW ID no. -- -- -- 0 7
04-089 Commissioning date 2014-05-14 0 0 Commissioning date 3 7
00-100 Reset time 2012-01-01 -- -- Displays the last reset time 2 3
00:00
00-107 CPU temperature xxx °C 0 100 Display of the controller temperature 3 7
20-200 Version_VMLib -- -- -- Library version 5 7
20-201 Version_L2Lib -- -- -- Library version 5 7
20-202 Version_BSPLib -- -- -- Library version 5 7
20-203 Version_CommonLib -- -- -- Library version 5 7
01-215 Temporary reduction -- -- -- Information sent using the TT supervisor management 3 7
system
01-216 Temporary storage tank control -- -- -- Information sent using the TT supervisor management 3 7
system
01-217 Temporary storage tank set- -- -- -- Information sent using the TT supervisor management 3 7
point system

4 214 513 / 04 87
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-218 Temporary storage tank switch- -- -- -- Information sent using the TT supervisor management 3 7
off temp system
20-126 Fault statistics since unit start -- -- -- Fault statistics since unit start 4 7
20-127 Fault statistics today -- -- -- Fault statistics today 4 7
00-200 Info AF xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-201 Info RLF xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-202 Info VF xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-203 Info VF1 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-204 Info SF1 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-205 Info SF2 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-xxx Info VE3 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-206 Info VE4 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-207 Info VE5 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-208 Info VE6 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-209 Info VE7 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-210 Info VE8 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-211 Info VE9 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-212 Info VE1-FE1 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-213 Info VE2-FE1 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-214 Info VE3-FE1 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-215 Info VE1-FE2 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-216 Info VE2-FE2 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-217 Info VE3-FE2 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-218 Info VE1-FE3 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-219 Info VE2-FE3 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-220 Info VE3-FE3 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-221 Info VE1-FE4 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-222 Info VE2-FE4 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-223 Info VE3-FE4 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-224 Info VE1-FE5 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-225 Info VE2-FE5 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-226 Info VE3-FE5 xxx°C Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-227 Info VE10/IMP 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.

88 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


00-228 Info VE3/IMP-FE1 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-229 Info VE3/IMP-FE2 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-230 Info VE3/IMP-FE3 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-231 Info VE3/IMP-FE4 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-232 Info VE3/IMP-FE5 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-233 Info VE10V-FE1 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-234 Info VE10V-FE2 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-235 Info VE10V-FE3 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.

00-236 Info VE10V-FE4 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-237 Info VE10V-FE5 0 Information input, can be used for the control technology 0 7
(MOD bus), for example.
00-239 Info VE10/IMP FLR 0 Information input for fresh water module hydraulics 61, 0 7
can also be used for the control technology (MOD bus), for
example

10.1.8 Bootloader
Internal datapoints for the bootloader function. No settings are required here.
Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
20-000 ProductionDate -- -- -- 0 6
20-001 Serial number -- -- -- 0 6
20-002 Unit type -- -- -- 0 6
20-003 Bootloader version -- -- -- 0 6
20-004 Software version -- -- -- 0 6
20-005 CPU ID -- -- -- 0 6
20-020 Bootloader status -- -- -- 0 6
20-021 Bootloader progress -- -- -- 0 6

10.1.9 General – sensor balancing


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
01-219 Sensor offset AF 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-220 Sensor offset VF 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-229 Sensor offset VF1 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-221 Sensor offset RLF 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-230 Sensor offset SF1 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-231 Sensor offset SF2 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.

4 214 513 / 04 89
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-222 Sensor offset VE3 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-223 Sensor offset VE4 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-224 Sensor offset VE5 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-225 Sensor offset VE6 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-226 Sensor offset VE7 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-227 Sensor offset VE8 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-228 Sensor offset VE9 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-232 Sensor offset VE1-FE1 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-233 Sensor offset VE2-FE1 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-234 Sensor offset VE3/IMP-FE1 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-235 Sensor offset VE1-FE2 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-236 Sensor offset VE2-FE2 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-237 Sensor offset VE3/IMP-FE2 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-238 Sensor offset VE1-FE3 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-239 Sensor offset VE2-FE3 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-240 Sensor offset VE3/IMP-FE3 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-241 Sensor offset VE1-FE4 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-242 Sensor offset VE2-FE4 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-243 Sensor offset VE3/IMP-FE4 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-244 Sensor offset VE1-FE5 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-245 Sensor offset VE2-FE5 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.

90 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


01-246 Sensor offset VE3/IMP-FE5 0.0K -10 10 This value corrects the measured temperature of the 2 2
variable input in order to compensate for unfavourable
installation positions or long cable runs.
01-247 Measuring range VE1 + VE2 100.0 1.0 1000.0 Used for setting the measuring range for pressure 2 2
transmission into the energy centre (differential pressure
transmission)
Example: 0–16 bar sensors 01–247=160.0 and 01–
248=0.0 or -4–16 bar sensors 01–247=200.0 and
01–248=-40.0
01-248 Offset VE1 + VE2 0.0 -1000.0 1000.0 This value corrects the measuring range 2 2

10.1.10 Commands (reset)


The following commands can be carried out in the General – Configuration – Parameter 04-045 menu:
0: No action
3 : MBUS HW reset = The supply voltage on the MBUS interface is interrupted briefly
9: Unit reset = unit restart like power off/on
(no reset of par. to factory setting)
21: Error unlocking (legionella protection value not achieved)
31: Factory reset (reset the controller to factory setting)

Additional info: If the hydraulic application is adjusted on the controller, all parameters – with the exception of the
switching times, texts and IP or CAN-LON settings – are reset to their factory setting.

10.1.11 Outdoor sensor behaviour


There are various fresh air sensors in the system for measuring the outside temperature.

Overview of outdoor sensor inputs


Parameters Function Par-ID
AF1: Outdoor sensor 1 (local HW input, can be

determined for system outdoor sensor AFG1) General 00-000


AF2: Outdoor sensor 2 (local HW input) General 21-100
AFG1: System outdoor sensor 1 (one outdoor sensor in the system is defined as system
outdoor sensor AFG1) General 21-101
AFG2: System outdoor sensor 2 (an outdoor sensor value can be transferred to the system
from the Internet = system outdoor sensor 2 AFG2) General 21-102

Parameters
Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID
Input allocation outdoor sensor 1 (default setting by hydraulic
application,
must be switched off if not used) 11) - General 30-028
Input allocation outdoor sensor 2 0 2) - General 30-029
Send outdoor sensor 1 as system outdoor sensor AFG1 0 - General 04-013
Heating
Heating circuit allocation outdoor sensor (per HC) 1 - circuit .. 07-037
Time constant for outdoor temp. AV calc. HC limit Heating
(per HC – for heating limit) 0 h circuit .. 03-019
Heating
Time constant for outdoor temp. AV calc. (per HC – for heating curve) 2 h circuit .. 03-020

4 214 513 / 04 91
Function modules and control functions

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Heating
Weighting for average value OT heating circuit (per HC) 50 % circuit .. 03-033
Heating
Replacement value outside temp. (per HC) 0 °C circuit .. 03-034

1)
Possible allocations: 0= OFF, 1= AF
2)
Possible allocations: 0=OFF, 1=RLF, 2=VF, 3=VF1, 4=SF1, 5=SF2, 6=VE3, 7=VE4, 8=VE5, 9=VE6, 10=VE7,
11=VE8, 12=VE9

Operating parameters
Operating parameter Factory UN Function Par-ID
Outside temperature day minimum (AF1 or AFG1) 1 - General 21-103
Outside temperature day maximum (AF1 or AFG1) 0 - General 21-104
Outside temperature heating circuit Heating
(OT-HC, weighted outside temperature; per HC) 0 - circuit .. 00-000
Heating
Time constant for outdoor temp. AV calc. HC limit (per HC) 0 h circuit ... 03-019
AF average value = long-term value according to time constant
setting Heating
(OT average; per heating circuit) 1 - circuit .. 02-020
Heating
Time constant for outdoor temp. AV calc. (per HC) 2 h circuit .. 03-020

Finding, distribution
Outdoor sensor 1 can be allocated to a HW input. The allocation is done by the hydraulic application type.
Outdoor sensor 1 can be sent on the system bus by means of a parameter (AFG1).
Outdoor sensor 2 can be allocated to a HW input.
Two outside temperatures (AFG1, AFG2) can be received on the system bus and used internally. These system out-
side temperatures are available to all other bus participants.

Note: if an outdoor sensor is allocated but not connected, an error code is generated. To prevent this, it must be set
to “not allocated”.

Observation
The four outside temperatures (AF1, AF2, AFG1, AFG2) are configured as information values.
Using outdoor sensor AF1 (or AFG1 if AF1 not available), the minimum (AF-Min) and the maximum (AF-Max) are
obtained during the day. The limit value calculation is reset at midnight. The two extreme values are provided as infor-
mation values.

Use in the heating circuit


Using a parameter 07-037, it is possible to select which outside temperature or which weighted average a heating
circuit uses.
0: AFG1
1: AF1
2: AF2
3: Weighted average (AF1–AF2)
4: Weighted average (AF1–AFG1)
5: Weighted average (AF1–AFG2)
6: Weighted average (AFG1–AFG2)

92 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Weighting average value


The parameter 03-033 “Weight for average” (G) states the value with which the first indicated temperature is weighted.
OTwAV(OTx1,OTx2) = OTx1*G+OTx2*(1-G) where G=0%-100%)

Example of weighted average AF1–AF2:


AF1=15°C
AF2=10°C
Weight for average value: 50%
Result:
Weighted average o utside temperature OTwAV: 12.5°C

The weighted average value over time is obtained using parameter 03-019 “Time constant for outdoor temp. AV calc.
HC limit” and this defines the outside temperature heating circuit (00-000).
OT-Hc = Averaging (TwAV,tavge)

OT averaging long-term value


The weighted average value over time is obtained using parameter 03-020 “Time constant for outside temp. AV calc. ”.
OT-avge = Averaging (TwAV,tavge)

xUse for characteristic curve


The averaged outside temperature heating circuit and the averaged long-term value are equally averaged for determi-
ning the flow temperature using the heating characteristic curve:
OT-HC = (OTwAV + OT-avge) / 2

Use for heating limits


The outdoor temperature heating circuit (OT-HC) is used for determining the heating limits.

This means the calculation of the heating characteristic is more sluggish than the switching of the heating limits - or
vice versa - depending on the setting of the calculation.
Example 1: For a usual heating system, the heating is switched on/off depending on the current outdoor temperature
(03-019 =0h) and the calculation of the heating curve is averaged (03-020 = 2h).
Example 2: For a heating system with boiler in a shady location, the OT can drop for a few hours during the transitional
time but this should not yet activate the heating. Here, the switching of the heating can be delayed according to the
outside temperature (03-019 =5h) and the calculation of the heating curve is lightly averaged (03-020 = 2h).

Use with heat generator


The heat generator function is used for the outside temperature-dependent block of the AF1; if this is not available then
the AFG1, and if this is also not available then the replacement value (0 °C) is used.

4 214 513 / 04 93
Function modules and control functions

10.1.12 Maintenance
The “Maintenance configuration” parameter sets which events trigger the maintenance display. If the parameter is set
to “No display maintenance” (0) then the function is inactive.

Event maintenance according to date


The message is generated at the end of the set day. If the message is acknowledged, the event only reoccurs if a date
is set after the current date.
If this event is configured, this set date is displayed in the datapoint “Date next maintenance”.

Event maintenance according to interval


The message is generated if the interval has expired (end of the day). The interval is restarted after the message has
been acknowledged.
If this event is configured, the date resulting from the date of the last acknowledgement and the interval is displayed in
the datapoint “Date next maintenance”.

Process
If the set even occurs, it leads to an “entry in the error system”: Error type = 7 (service/maintenance necessary).
Using the “Acknowledge” parameter, the value 7 acknowledges the maintenance. (Value 8 would be cleaning acknowl-
edgement)
The control module displays the message directly. The specialist (user level required) can also acknowledge this error
message there without having to enter the parameter level.

Parameter Factory UN Function Par-ID


Maintenance configuration
0: No display maintenance
1: Display maintenance on set date General-
2: Display maintenance according to interval 0 - maintenance 20-034
Date of next maintenance message General-
(Max. current date +4 years) - maintenance 20-035
Next maintenance interval since acknowledgement General-
(1 – 364 days) Days maintenance 20-036
Maintenance counter value message maintenance (step width: 100) General-
(Operating hours and 0.1 x switching cycles (H-Gen)) maintenance 20-037
Acknowledgement
(Value 7 = maintenance acknowledgement, value 8 = cleaning ack- General-
nowledgement) cleaning 21-054
Information
General-
Date of next maintenance - information 21-057
General-infor-
Remaining run time maintenance counter - mation 21-058

94 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

10.1.13 Thermostat function


Three thermostat functions can be activated in the controller. The description below relates to the first thermostat
function.
A thermostat function is activated by allocating the thermostat output THA1 and thermostat sensor THF1.

The thermostat output is switched on if the temperature drops below the reference value less half the differential gap,
and is switched off if the sensor temperature rises above the reference value plus half the differential gap. The function
starts switched-off when the controller is restarted.

Overview
Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID
Allocation output THA1 - thermostat 1
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1, 5=YK1open,
6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1,
15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-
FE3, 20=VA2-FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, General-
24=VA3-FE4 0 - thermostat 30-028
Allocation input THF1 - thermostatic sensor 1
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- General-
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 0 - thermostat 30-029
General-
Reference value (THF ref.) 0 °C thermostat 29-060
General-
Switching difference (THF-SD symmetrical) 3 K thermostat 29-063
Information
General-
THA1 thermostat 1 output - information 22-002
General-
THF1 actual thermostatic sensor 1 °C information 21-012

10.1.14 External fault reporting output (SMA)


If a fault reporting output was configured, it is also possible to set a triggering delay time

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Allocation SMA collective fault output: General-
0=OFF, 1=VA2, 2=DKP 0 - configuration 32-045
General-
Collective fault output delay time 1 Min. parameters 04-017

10.1.15 External fault reporting input


If an external fault reporting input was configured, it is also possible to set a triggering delay time.

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Allocation external fault signal input
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4, General-
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9 0 - configuration 30-035
General-
Collective fault input delay time 1 Min. parameters 04-018

4 214 513 / 04 95
Function modules and control functions

10.1.16 Free time clock (32-022)


If a “free time clock” was configured, it is possible to create a week program with 5 day programs in the switching time
program for this. (See standard week/day program free time clock)
The switching programs are set in the “Programs” menu. The “Free time clock” is displayed as soon as the output has
been configured.

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Allocation free time clock output:
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWauf, 3=YFWzu, 4=MK1, 5=YK1auf, 6=YK1zu,
7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1,
16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2- General-
FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4 0 - configuration 32-022

10.1.17 Differential controller


Three differential control functions can be activated in the controller. DF3 can also be allocated a 0–10 V output with
corresponding function. The description below relates to the first differential control.
A differential control is activated by assigning the differential control output DFA1 and the diff. sensors DF1-1, DF2-1.
If the difference between DF1-1 and DF2-1 sensor increases by the set ON differential gap, the output switches on.
If the difference between DF1-1 and DF2-1 sensor subsequently falls below the set OFF differential gap, the output
switches off.
It is also possible to set a min. and max. temp.
A switch-off takes place if the temperature at the DF2-1 sensor rises above the set max. temperature.
If the sensor DF2-1 -5K falls below the max. temp. the differential control is enabled again.
A switch-off takes place if the temperature at the DF1-1 sensor falls below the set min. temperature.
If the sensor DF1-1 +5K rises above the min. temp. the differential control is enabled again.

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Allocation output DFA1 - diff. control 1:
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1, 5=YK1open,
6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1,
15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-
FE3, 20=VA2-FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, General
24=VA3-FE4 0 - diff. control 32-041
Allocation input DF1-1 - diff. control 1 sensor 1:
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- General
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 0 - diff. control 30-039
Allocation input DF2-1 - diff. control 1 sensor 2:
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- General
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 0 - diff. control 30-042
General
Differential control 1 switch-on difference 8 K diff. control 29-066
General
Differential control 1 switch-off difference 4 K diff. control 29-069
General
Differential control 1 min. temp. 10 °C diff. control 29-072
General
Differential control 1 max. temp. 90 °C diff. control 29-075

96 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Information
General-
DFA1 differential control 1 output - information 22-005
General-
DF1-1 actual differential control 1 sensor 1 °C information 21-015
General-
DF2-1 actual differential control 1 sensor 2 °C information 21-018

10.1.18 Plant flow control PFC


Many plant flow controls are possible in the system. They can be integrated on various modules (TTE-WEZ, TTE-FW,
TTE-HK/WW). However, only one PFC is possible per control module.

With TTE-FW, among the standard functions of the controller, the following settings are available using IT 05-089 for
the setting of PFC - 1-32 for WEZ/FW/HK/WW modules; 33-37 for the function of internal pilot control loop domestic
hot water.

Plant flow control (PFC) controls a pump and regulates the measured temperature at a reference value by means of a
mixer. The behaviour of the control is very similar to that of a heating circuit mixer control.
The plant flow control itself does not generate a reference value for the heat generator.
Remark: if the mixer is open, the flow passes through the heat generator, whereas if it is closed then the flow bypasses
the heat generator.

Determining the reference value


The reference value is derived from the largest value of all heating circuits and all hot water circuits that are allocated to
this plant flow control. If this reference value is greater than zero then there is a request, otherwise not. If the reference
value is less than zero then there is no request.
If there is a request, the reference value formed in this way is increased by the set offset, and then limited to the set
minimum and maximum.

Process
When there is a request, the pump is switched on and the mixer is controlled. If the request is cancelled, the plant flow
control enters post-operation. In post operation, the pump remains switched on and the mixer is controlled with the
last reference value. Following post operation, the pump is switched off, the mixer is closed during the double mixer
runtime and then switched off.

Forced removal
Plant flow control responds to forced energy greater than zero. In this case, it regulates using the reference value
maximum instead of with the current reference value. If it is running, the pump is also switched on. The corresponding
pump is also switched on.
TTE FW TTE HC
TTE FW TTE-FW
module

VF 2 B1 VF 1 B1 VF 1 B1

AVR-2 AVR-1

AVF2 AVR2 AVR1 AVF1


T T T T T T T T
MK 2 MK 1 MK 1 SL P
Transmission line

Transmission line

M
YK2 M
YK1 M
YK1

Dies ist ein


unerlaubter Weg!
P
Gehen Sie einen
Schritt zurück oder
löschen Sie dieses
Shape!
Sie Heat
haben
Möglichkeit
die
ein
generator
neues Shape zu
nehmen!!!
hovhovalhovalhova
l
hovhoval
hovhoval

No inter-building installation possible!

Overview:
4 214 513 / 04 97
Function modules and control functions

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID


Type plant flow control: General PFC
0: Plant flow control is only controlled by reference values 0 - control 06-060
Allocation input PFC, plant flow sensor:
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=AF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- General PFC
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 1) - control 30-007
Allocation output AVP, pump plant flow control:
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1, 5=YK1open,
6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1,
15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-
FE3, 20=VA2-FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, General PFC
24=VA3-FE4 1) - control 32-025
Allocation output YAV OPEN, plant flow mixer:
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1, 5=YK1open,
6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1,
15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-
FE3, 20=VA2-FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, General PFC
24=VA3-FE4 1) - control 32-026
Allocation output YAV CLOSED, plant flow mixer:
0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1, 5=YK1open,
6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2, 13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1,
15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2, 17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-
FE3, 20=VA2-FE3, 21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, General PFC
24=VA3-FE4 1) - control 32-027
General PFC
Minimum temperature PFC 0 °C control 06-061
General PFC
Maximum temperature PFC 90 °C control 06-062
General PFC
Offset PFC control 0 K control 06-063
General PFC
Proportional range PFC control 40 K control 06-064
General PFC
Plant flow control adjusting time 40 K control 06-068
General PFC
Plant flow control calculation time 60 sec control 06-069
General PFC
Follow-on time AVP pump 1 min control 06-065
General PFC
Mixer running time YAV 120 sec control 06-066
Allocation heating circuit to PFC
1-8 = WEZ/FW 1 to 8
17-32 = HC/DHW 1 to 16
Example: Allocated PFC module: HC/DHW with DIP switch addr. 9 = Heating circuit -
25 - heating circuit .. 07-100
Allocation hot water to PFC
1-8 = WEZ/FW 1 to 8
17-32 = HC/DHW 1 to 16
Example: Allocated PFC module: HC/DHW with DIP switch addr. 9 = Hot water
25 - Hot water.. 05-089

98 4 214 513 / 04
Function modules and control functions

Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID

Information
General-
PFC set temperature (incl. offset) °C information 22-021
General-
PFC actual temperature °C information 21-059
General-
AVP pump - information 22-055
General-
YAV mixer open/closed (+100 … -100%) % information 22-056

1)
The allocation takes place by setting the hydraulic application

10.1.19 Configuration 0-10V/PWM output characteristic curve


Max. three 0-10V/PWM outputs can be activated in the controller.
The following document describes conversion from an internal normalised value (e.g. speed of rotation or TTE FW
setpoint temperature) to a 0..10V/PWM output.

The control assumes a normalised parameter in percent (speed of rotation, output, 0..10V). This is output on the al-
located output as a PWM signal or 0..10V voltage.
It is assumed that limits, where required, will be made in the outputting function. E.g. the TTE FW reference value is
limited to 45 °C downwards or the speed of rotation of the main pump is limited to 30%.

Control PWM
The 0-10V/PWM output must be allocated and configured as PWM. If the function is inactive, the output must be con-
figured to “not allocated”.
The input parameter (%) his output one-to-one. That means 75% is output as PWM with a mark-to-space ratio of 3 to 1:

Using the “Configuration output” parameter, it is possible for the signal to be output inverted as well:

4 214 513 / 04 99
Function modules and control functions

Control 0 .. 10V
The output must be allocated and configured as 0..10V. If the function is inactive, the output must be configured to
“not allocated”.
The input parameter (%) is converted into a voltage using a linear characteristic (according to the set characteristic)
and applied to the output. The characteristic is determined by the 2 point pairs {X1,Y1} and {X2,Y2}. It is limited down-
wards to the switch-off voltage (UOff) and upwards to 10V.

V
y
10

{X2,Y2}

{X1,Y1}
0 °C
0 50 x
100

The characteristic can also have a negative slope. In this case, the switch-off voltage is not considered.

V
y
10 {X1,Y1}

{X2,Y2}
0 %
0 50 x
100

100 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

Overview:
Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID
Configuration 0-10V/PWM output 1:
0: Off
1: 0–10 V
2: 0–10 V inverted
3: PWM (0% = 0 V) General
4: PWM inverted (0% = 10 V) 0 - 0-10V/PWM 33-100
General
Characteristic curve 1 (X1) 0.0 %/°C 0-10V/PWM 20-038
General
Characteristic curve 1 vltg. (Y1) at X1 0 V 0-10V/PWM 20-039
General
Characteristic curve 1 (X2) 100 %/°C 0-10V/PWM 20-040
General
Characteristic curve 1 vltg. (Y2) at X2 10 V 0-10V/PWM 20-041
General
Characteristic curve 1 sw-off voltage 0.0 V 0-10V/PWM 20-054

10.1.20 Power limitation


In addition to the hydraulic limitation of the usage quantity, the controller performs a comparison between the current
power and the maximum permitted power of the system. The regulation takes place as with the return limitation by
lowering the set temperature. If the power limitation is active, the parameter 00-099 in the service level is displayed.

Example set power 10 kW Example set power 10 kW


Power limiting factor 50% Power limiting factor 100%
Set temperature

Limit when frost protection


limit reached

Time

In the left example of the graphic above, the plant runs with 15 kW. The set, permitted maximum output is 10 kW,
however, with an output limit factor of 50%.

After a minute, a limitation of 25% is calculated (at 15 kW the current output exceeds the permitted maximum output
of 10 kW by 50%). An output limitation factor of 50% produces a reduction of 25% if the current output of 50% is
exceeded.
The reference value is reduced from 55 °C to 41.25 °C. (25% reduction from 55 °C = 13.75 °C. Flow from 55 °C –
13.75 °C = 41.25 °C new reference value.)

After a further minute, the plant is still running with 12 kW. Because the withdrawal rate is still too high, the limitation
is increased by a further 10% (20% overshoot of the maximum permitted output of 10 kW, power limitation factor

4 214 513 / 04 101


Function modules and control functions

50% produces a further reduction of 10%) which means the reference value is reduced by a total of 35% from 55 °C
to 35.75 °C.
This calculation and thus the power reduction is repeated on an ongoing basis until the output is stable at the maxi-
mum output of 10 kW.
If the maximum output of 10 kW is undershot, the limitation is revoked gradually again in the same manner and
increased step-by-step.

10.1.21 Cancelling the reduction


Parameters 01-206 “full night-time reduction at outside temperature” and 01-207 “no night-time reduction at outside
temperature” make it possible to reduce the reduction as the outside temperature drops. This function makes it possi-
ble to prevent morning switch-on peaks, thus reducing the load on the supply system.

For this purpose, the maximum room setpoint temperature of the day is used within the active time program in compa-
rison to the current room setpoint temperature of the time program. The diagram shows the function using the resulting
flow setpoint temperature.

VL (°C)

90
01-207
80 No nighttime reduction
at outside temp

70

07-008 Flow maximum


60 temperature

Cancellation
50

40
01-206 Example highest
30 Full nighttime switching point
reduction at outside
temp
20 Current switching point

10

0 AT (°C)

-32 -28 -24 -20 16 -12 -8 -4 0 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32

102 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.1.22 Return limitation in heating operation


The limiting curve for the return temperature can be defined for the return temperature using the “return temperature
at -20°C” and “return temperature at +20°C” set values.
If the current return temperature exceeds this curve, the set values of the heating circuits are reduced step-by-step.
If the return flow limitation is active, the parameter 00-098 is displayed in the service level or in the info level. With
parameter 04-022, it is possible to define whether only the primary valve is reduced or also the secondary circuits too.
If the return temperature drops back below this curve, the set values of the heating circuits are increased again slowly.

RL (°C)

01-201 Return temperature


at -20 °C

01-202 Return temperature


at +20 °C

AT (°C)

The reduction takes place for TTE-FW circuits only up to the calculated maximum return temperature. The reference
value can be reduced to 0 for affected H-Gen or HC/DHW circuits.

Notice:
The return limitation is intended to deal with temporary peaks in a well adapted system. If the settings are too tight or
if there are hydraulic problems, the system can be deactivated with the return limitation.

To accept the return limitation, the forced energy selection must be released on the particular heating circuit 07-034.

4 214 513 / 04 103


Function modules and control functions

10.1.23 Faults
In the Faults menu, it is possible to read out the active faults. In addition, the last 20 faults can be requested in the
error memory.

Overview:
Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID
General
Active error 1 - Malfunctions 29-042
General
Active error 2 - Malfunctions 29-043
General
Active error 3 - Malfunctions 29-044
General
Active error 4 - Malfunctions 29-045
General
Active error 5 - Malfunctions 29-046
General
Error memory - Malfunctions 29-040
General
Error to be transmitted - Malfunctions 29-041

Overview of error codes, see error code list (last section)

10.1.24 Relay test


The current status of the output relay can be requested in the Relay test menu.
If the relay test is activated, all outputs are switched off at the same time. Following that, each output can be switched
on/off individually.
If you forget to switch off the relay test at the end of the test, it is ended automatically after 15 minutes.

104 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.1.25 TTE - sensor characteristics


In the TTE-FW and TTE-FW com controllers, PT1000, PTC or KTY81 sensors are used.
An interruption or short-circuit is detected as an error.
Overview of the stored sensor characteristics:

Temp. Type 0 = KTY81-210 Type 1 = PTC Type 2 = PT1000


°C Ohm Ohm Ohm
-50 1030,00 803,10
-40 1135,00 593,00 842,70
-30 1247,00 653,00 882,20
-20 1367,00 702,00 921,60
-10 1495,00 766,00 960,90
0 1630,00 831,00 1000,00
10 1772,00 891,00 1039,02
20 1922,00 964,00 1077,93
25 2000,00 1003,00 1093,46
30 2080,00 1042,00 1116,72
40 2245,00 1121,00 1155,39
50 2417,00 1202,00 1193,95
60 2597,00 1292,00 1232,39
70 2785,00 1384,00 1270,72
80 2980,00 1476,00 1308,93
90 3182,00 1576,00 1347,02
100 3392,00 1670,00 1385,00
110 3607,00 1763,00 1422,86
120 3817,00 1856,00 1460,61
130 4008,00 1498,24
140 4166,00 1535,75
150 4280,00 1573,15
160 1610,43
170 1647,60
180 1684,65
190 1721,58
200 1758,40
220 1831,68
240 1904,51
260 1976,86
280 2048,76
300 2120,19
320 2191,15
340 2261,66
360 2331,69
380 2401,27
400 2470,38
450 2641,12
500 2811,00

4 214 513 / 04 105


Function modules and control functions

10.1.26 Commissioning
Internal datapoints for the commissioning wizard function. No settings are required here.

10.1.27 Commissioning TopTronic® E module expansion


First, the TopTronic® E FW controller must be deenergised. The “Module” interface on the TopTronic® E FW must be
connected with the cable provided. The assignment of the function application for the heating circuit or the domestic
hot water is made using the parameter 7-076. This parameter can be found in the respective menu (heating circuit or
domestic hot water) under Configuration.

Now, the configuration pin must be connected briefly within a few seconds, e.g. using a screwdriver (pin 1 to pin 2).

Following configuration, acknowledge this procedure and the system function can now be configured in the parame-
ters.

106 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

NOTICE
The configuration pin is located under the cover next to the module bus connection.
A maximum of 5 modules can be installed per TopTronic® E FW controller!
It is recommended for the module with the highest number to be activated first or, if there are problems,
for only one module to be connected after the other in each case.

10.1.28 Commissioning of TopTronic® E Ethernet connection


First, the TopTronic® com controller must be deenergised. The LAN I/O interface on the TopTronic® E FW (located un-
der the cover) must be connected with the cable provided. Following that, both units are switched on and an initialisa-
tion is performed. Following successful initialisation, the IP address input is made in the service level under IP Config.

4 214 513 / 04 107


Function modules and control functions

10.2 „Heating circuit“ function group


In the “heating circuit” function group, values must be set that are required for the five independent heating circuits
(1-5).
The heating circuit function regulates the room temperature of a heating zone in heating operation. The regulation of
the room temperature can be controlled by weather during heating by means of a heating characteristic, with room
control or mixed. Separate characteristics can be set for heating operation.

Flow [°C]

55 Heating and cooling characteristic


50

Heating
45
characteristic
Neutral zone Cooling
characteristic
40

35

30

25

20

15

10

0 OT [°C]

-10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32

108 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.2.1 Overview of “heating circuit” menu structure


Function group
(FunctionGroup 1)

Heating circuit
(FunctionGroupName)

Heating circuit 1
(FunctionName) Information
Heating circuit 1
(DefaultValue)

Function
name

Heating circuit 2
(FunctionName) Configuration
Heating circuit 2
(DefaultValue)

Heating
characteristic

Heating circuit 3 Cooling


(FunctionName)
characteristic
Heating circuit 3
(DefaultValue)

Screed

Heating circuit 4
(FunctionName) Parameters

Heating circuit 4
(DefaultValue)

Time
programmes

Commis-
Heating circuit 5 sioning
(FunctionName)

Heating circuit 5
(DefaultValue)
Manual
operating
mode

4 214 513 / 04 109


Function modules and control functions

10.2.2 Parameter overview „heating circuit 1 – 5“


All five heating circuits are equipped with equivalent functions. The overview below relates to “heating circuit 1”, for
example.

Heating circuit .. – information


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
02-051 Status heating circuit control 1 0 0 Status of heating circuit control: 0 7
0 = Switched off
1 = Normal heating operation
2 = Comfort heating operation
3 = Economy heating operation
4 = Frost operation
5 = Force acceptance (with force > +50%)
6 = Force throttling (with force < -50%)
7 = Holiday operation
8 = Party operation
9 = Normal cooling operation
10 = Comfort cooling operation
11 = Economy cooling operation
12 = Fault
13 = Manual operation
14 = Protection cooling operation
15 = Party operation cooling
16 = Drying heating-up phase
17 = Drying stationary phase
18 = Drying cooling-down phase
19 = Drying end phase
23 = Heating operation external/constant request
24 = Absent heating operation
128 = Pre-control OFF
129 = Pre-control ON
140 = Pre-control fault
01-002 Flow setpoint 50 °C 0.0 0.0 Flow set temperature 0 7
00-002 Flow actual 27.7 °C 0.0 0.0 Flow actual temperature 0 7
01-001 Room setpoint 22 °C 0.0 0.0 Room set temperature: 0 7
00-001 Room actual 25.5 °C 0.0 0.0 Room actual temperature 0 0
00-000 Outside temperature heating -0.4 °C 0.0 0.0 Outdoor temperature heating circuit. This value is used for 0 7
circuit calculating the flow reference value according to heat char-
acteristic (AF wAV + AF AV) / 2 and for the heating limits.
02-020 Outside average value -0.4 °C 0.0 0.0 AF average value = long-term value according to time 0 7
constant setting
01-020 Pump 1 0 1 0 7
29-050 Heat quantity xxxMWh -- -- Display heat consumption 0 7
29-051 Output kW -- -- Display output 0 7
01-021 Mixing valve 0% 0 100 Display of mixer setting 3 7
01-087 Cooling valve change-over unit 0 0 1 6 7
00-058 Relative humidity 0% 0 100 6 7
22-070 Dehumidification -- -- -- 6 7
00-057 CO2 concentration -- -- -- ppm 6 7
02-019 Remaining run time screed Days -- -- Remaining running time screed function (forecast in days) 0 7
function
00-003 Return actual xxx°C 0 100 Return temperature 0 7
00-004 Reference value operation xxx°C 0 100 Reference value operation 0 7

110 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

Heating circuit.. – configuration


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
07-076 Function application heating 0 0 6 Function application type heating circuit, assignment setting 3 3
circuit of function expansions
0=inactive
1=active on basic board
2=active FE1
3=active FE 2
4=active FE3
5=active FE4
6=active FE5
07-037 Alloc. outdoor sensor 1 0 6 Selection outdoor sensor 3 3
0=AFG1
1=AF1
2=AF2
3=Weighted average value AF1-AF2
4=Weighted average value AF1-AFG1
5=Weighted average value AF1-AFG2
6=Weighted average value AFG1-AFG2
30-046 Alloc. HC1 ext. constant req. 0=OFF Allocation input ext. constant request 3 3
input 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3,
8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9,
14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-
FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-045 Alloc. HC1 switching modem 0=OFF Allocation switching modem contact input (open = auto- 3 3
contact input matic, bridged = standby)
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-030 Alloc. HC1 min. value override 0=OFF Allocation minimum value override input 3 3
input 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-050 Alloc. MBusUnit 0 0 16 Allocation of the M-Bus unit 3 3
0=inactive
1=M-Bus unit 1, 2=M-Bus unit 2 etc.
30-047 Alloc. inp. room thermostat 0=OFF Allocation room thermostat input 3 3
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-051 Alloc. inp. room sensor 0=BM Allocation input room sensor
0=BM, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-FE2,
22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3,
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4,
30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4

4 214 513 / 04 111


Function modules and control functions

Heating circuit .. – heating characteristic


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
03-014 Heating curve from conf. p. 1 0 5 Specification of the rise from parameter 03-012 averaged 3 3
outside temperature.
03-012 Design point OT temp. heating 5 °C -30 10 Climate point/zone determined on the outside temperature 3 3
char. axis
03-013 Design point flow temp. heating 35 °C 10.0 90.0 Reference value for the flow temperature for 20 °C room 3 3
char. temperature set on the climate point.
03-001 Base point flow temp. heating 25 °C 0.0 90.0 Flow reference temperature for a room temperature of 20 3 3
char. °C in heating operation at the outside temperature base
point
03-011 Base point outside temp. 20 °C -10.0 30.0 Base point on outside temperature axis 3 3
heat/cool characteristic

Heating circuit .. – cooling characteristic


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
03-011 Base point outside temp. 20 °C -10.0 30.0 Base point on outside temperature axis 3 3
heat/cool characteristic
03-047 Config point outside temp. 35 °C 20 40 Outside temperature for the configuration flow temperature 3 3
cooling characteristic in cooling operation
03-048 Config point flow temp. cooling 20 °C 10.0 20.0 Configuration flow temperature for cooling operation 3 3
characteristic
03-043 Base point flow temp. cooling 22 °C 10.0 30.0 The base point temperature is the flow reference tempera- 3 3
characteristic ture for a room temperature of 22 °C in cooling operation at
the outside temperature base point.

Heating circuit .. – screed


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
04-061 Flow stpt. incr. heating-up phase 3 K/d 5 20.0 The parameter sets the flow reference value increase for 3 3
the heating-up phase of the drying program.
04-062 Flow setpoint drop cooling phase -6 K/d -50.0 -,5 The parameter sets the flow reference value decrease for 3 3
the cooling-down phase in the drying program.
04-063 Inertia phase return setpoint 30 °C 20.0 70.0 The parameter sets the flow reference value for the inertia 3 3
phase in the drying program.
04-064 Inertia phase duration 3 0.0 25.0 The parameter sets the time duration for the inertia phase. 3 3
04-060 Activate screed function 0 0 1 Activate screed function 3 3

Heating circuit .. – parameters


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
03-032 Control strategy 0 0 3 Control strategy (selection of flow reference value determi- 3 3
nation)
0: Weather control only
1: Weather control with room override
2: Room control only
3: Constant control - external requirement
07-035 Ref. value request type heating 1 0 6 This determines where the reference value request of the 3 3
circuit heating circuit is forwarded to.
Ref. value request type heating circuit:
0: None
1: H-Gen/DH
2: Heating buffer
5: H-Gen/DH + local
6: Heating buffer + local
In 5 and 6, the reference value is additionally sent to the
local primary valve in the “DH” application type so as to
implement networks which do not (!) extend beyond one
building, with several lines.
07-036 Flow setpoint contrast req. 45 °C 0 150 Flow reference value with constant requirement 3 3
07039 Flow setpoint min. value override 30°C 0 30 Flow setpoint min. value override 3 3

112 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


07-100 Allocation plant flow control 0 0 32 Allocation PFC control 3 3
0=without
1-8 = DH 1 to 8
17-32 = HC/DHW 1 to 16
Example: Allocated PFC module: HC/DHW with DIP switch
addr. 9 = 25
03-000 Room protection temperature 5 °C -10.0 15.0 The room protection temperature is effective as room refer- 3 3
ence value in standby, holiday and summer operation.
03-002 Eco mode heating limit 15 °C -10.0 20.0 In automatic operation, a separate heating limit can be 2 2
set here for eco mode. If the average outside temperature
exceeds the value, the heating switches off whereas if the
average outside temperature drops by 0.5 K under the
set value, the heating switches back on. If the value is set
below 2 °C, frost protection is activated.
03-006 Hold-back time start optimisation 90 min 0.0 900.0 This means the switch-on time in automatic mode can be 3 3
brought forward. The hold-back time specifies the heat-
ing-up time that is required for raising the room temperature
by 5 K at -10°C outdoor temperature. The time is auto-
matically corrected with changing outdoor temperatures.
Empirical values:
Floor heating = 210 min
Radiators = 150 min
0 = Not functioning.
03-007 Room temperature compensa- 1 0 50 With room temperature compensation, it is possible to set a 3 3
tion room influence if a valid room temperature is present. The
set compensation multiplied by the deviation of the room
temperature produces the correction of the flow tempera-
ture. Setting values:
1-3 = Weak compensation
4-6 = Medium compensation
7-10 = Strong compensation. This value should not be set
higher than 4 with underfloor heating systems.
03-008 Flow setpoint heating limit -30K -30.0 10.0 The heating circuit can be switched off with the flow 3 3
temperature heating limit. If the calculated flow reference
temperature drops below the setting value plus the room
reference temperature, the heating is switched off. This
function takes precedence over outside temperature heating
limit deactivation. If the reference value increases by 2 K
again, heating control returns to operation. This function is
not active at the minimum setting.
03-019 Time constant for fresh air temp. 0h 0 24,0 Time constant for calculating the outdoor temperature 3 3
av. calc. HC limit average value (for heating limit)
03-020 Time constant for fresh air temp. 2h 0 50 Time constants for ext. temp. av. calc. 3 3
av. calc. Time constant for calculating the outdoor temperature aver-
age value (for heating curve):
Heavy construction type 20 - 30 h
Medium construction type 10 - 15 h
Light construction type 3 - 6 h
03-020 Time constants for ext. temp. 2h 0 50 Time constant for calculating the outside temperature aver- 2 2
av. calc. age value (for heating limit):
Heavy construction 20 - 30 h
Medium construction 10 - 15 h
Light construction 3 - 6 h
03-021 Outside temperature heating 18 °C 0.0 40.0 With the setting, the heating limit is determined for a room 3 3
limit temperature of 20 °C. If the average outside temperature
exceeds the value, the heating switches off whereas if the
average outside temperature drops by 0.5 K under the
set value, the heating switches back on. If the value is set
below 2 °C, frost protection is activated.
03-023 Outside temp. frost line 2 °C -10.0 20.0 If the outside temperature drops below the set value, the 3 3
frost protection functions are activated for the heating
circuit. If the average outside temperature increases 2 K
above the set value, the frost protection function switches
off again.
03-024 Time constants for room temp. 10 min 0 60 With this time constant, damping of the room temperature is 3 3
av. calc. set for the room heating limit:
0 min = Direct heating limit function
> 20 min = Delayed heating limit function

4 214 513 / 04 113


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


03-025 Deviation accelerates heating 0K 0.0 10.0 This parameter enables the deviation from the reference 3 3
room temperature to be set for forced heating operation.
03-026 Heating deviation off 0K 0.0 10.0 This parameter enables the deviation from the reference 3 3
room temperature to be set for switching off heating oper-
ation.
03-030 Room control adjusting time 1.5 min 0.0 200.0 If the heating circuit is controlled with room control, this al- 3 3
lows an adjusting time to be set. The adjusting time means
that a proportional error due to the room compensation is
balanced out.
03-036 Cooling limit outside temperature 20 °C 15.0 40.0 The setting determines from which average outside 6 3
temperature onwards a cooling function is blocked. If the
average outside temperature increases 0.5 K above the set
value, the cooling is enabled.
03-039 Increase dew point limit 0K 0.0 10.0 With this parameter, a safety increase of the flow limit for 6 3
the dew point it can be set in cooling operation. A setting of
0 means that the dew point limit is inactive.
03-041 Cooling deviation off 0K 0.0 10.0 This parameter enables the deviation from the reference 6 3
room temperature to be set for switching off cooling opera-
tion.
03-042 Forced cooling deviation 0K 0.0 10.0 This parameter enables the deviation from the reference 6 3
room temperature to be set for forced cooling operation.
03-044 Summer compensation interven- 20 °C 20.0 30.0 If the outside temperature rises above the set value, the 3 3
tion point reference value for the room temperature increases with the
set slope.
03-045 Summer compensation slope 0% 0 100 The slope sets the influence of the outside temperature 3 3
change on the room temperature increase.
03-050 Heating operation choice Week 1 The setting determines the operation choice of the heating 0 0
circuit:
0 = Standby
1 = Week 1
2 = Week 2
4 = Constant (constant normal mode)
5 = Economy mode (constant eco mode)
7 = Manual operation heating
03-051 Normal room temp. heating 22 °C 10.0 30.0 The parameter selects the required reference value for the 0 0
operation room temperature in normal heating operation.
03-053 Conservation room temp heating 18°C 5.0 20.0 The parameter selects the required reference value for the 0 0
operation room temperature in economy heating operation.
03-054 Normal room temperature 24 °C 10.0 30.0 The parameter selects the required reference value for the 0 0
cooling mode room temperature in normal cooling operation.
03-056 Conservation room temperature 26 °C 20.0 35.0 The parameter selects the required reference value for the 0 0
cooling mode room temperature in economy cooling operation.
03-058 Comfort 0K -3.0 3.0 The comfort changes the reference value of the room tem- 0 0
perature by the set value.
03-110 Minimum plant temperature 15 °C 1.0 90.0 The heating circuit can be switched off with the plant tem- 3 5
perature heating limit. If the plant temperature drops below
the calculated flow reference temperature, the heating is
switched off. If the plant temperature increases again by 2
K, heating control returns to operation.
03-111 Switch-off difference plant tem- 0K -100.0 30.0 The heating circuit can be switched off with the plant tem- 3 3
perature perature differential heating limit. If the plant temperature
drops below the calculated flow reference temperature plus
setting value, the heating is switched off. If the plant tem-
perature differential increases again by 2 K, heating control
returns to operation.
07-001 Heat generator increase flow set 0K -100.0 50.0 The parameter enables an increase to be set for the flow 3 3
value reference temperature on the heat generator system.
07-002 Flow minimum temp. 0 °C 0 80.0 The flow temperature of the corresponding circuit is limited 3 3
to this lower value. The calculated set temperature for a
heating circuit is not allowed to undershoot this value.

114 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


07-008 Flow maximum temp. 70°C 0 120 The flow temperature of the corresponding circuit is limited 3 3
to this upper value. The calculated set temperature for this
heating circuit is not allowed to exceed this value. The limit
is always active on heating circuit 1 in the district heating
controller and defines the maximum flow temperature of all
subsequent circuits, whether the DKP1 is active or inactive.
The only exception is the setting of the priority operation
function in DHW charging because DKP 1 might also be
configured as an underfloor heating circuit and thus the
maximum flow temperature is normally set to 45°C.
07-003 Pump follow-on 0 min 0.0 30.0 After heating operation switches off, the mixer control 3 3
remains in operation for the set time. Then the mixer closes
and, after further time has elapsed, the mixer and pump
outputs switch off.
07-005 Heating circuit type 0 0 3 The following heating circuit types can be set: 3 3
0 = 3-point mixer control
2 = Pump control
4 = Output on VA1
5 = Output on VA3
6 = Output on VA4
7 = Output on VA5
07-006 Flow error duration 0.2 h 0.0 20.0 If the flow temperature drops below the reference value 3 3
for longer than the time set here, an error message is
generated. With value “0” the check is deactivated.
07-007 Deviation flow fault 10 K 0 50 Setting possibility of the deviation magnitude. 3 3
07-009 Manual mode set temperature 25 °C 10.0 90.0 In manual operating mode, the flow temperature is con- 0 0
trolled at the setpoint set here.
07-014 Cooling mode enable 0 0 3 The following operating modes can be set here for cooling 6 6
operation:
0 = Cooling operation switched off
1 = Cooling operation free, mixer closed
2 = Cooling operation free, mixer open
3 = Cooling operation free, mixer controlled
07-016 Stand prot. HC pump 0 0 1 Stand prot. HC pump and mixer
07-034 Forced energy choice 3 0 3 The setting controls the response of the heating circuit to 3 3
forced energy:
0 = Heating circuit does not respond to forced energy
1 = Responds to negative forced energy
2 = Responds to positive forced energy
3 = Responds to negative and positive forced energy
03-033 Outside temperature weighting 50% 0 100 Weighting outside temp. for outside HC 3 3
03-034 Outside temperature 0 °C -50.0 50.0 Replacement value outside temperature (on failure of the 3 3
replacement value outside temperature)
07-048 Flow temp. monitor delay time 1 min 0.0 30.0 Delay time blocking message B1 flow temp. monitor 3 3
07-020 Adjusting time 40 0 10000 Parameter for the integral portion of the mixer control for the 3 3
specified heating circuit. The adjusting time is the time (in
seconds) during which a given set/actual difference should
have the same effect on the mixer as an equally large
proportional deviation.
07-021 P-band 40 0 10000 Parameter for the proportional portion of the mixer control 3 3
for the specified heating circuit. The P-band is that tem-
perature change that should have a full deflection (= 100%
operating time) on the mixer.
07-022 Controller runtime 30sec 1 10000 Operating time of the mixer control loop. Example: The 3 3
operating time of the motor is 120 seconds. The set value
30 is then ¼ of the entire operating time, which means the
calculation is performed every 30 seconds. The set value
should usually be ¼ of the total operating time in all cases.
07-023 Mixer calculation 0 0 2 0=OFF, 1=Analog, 2=Calculation 3 3
07-024 Mixer running time 120sec 0 600 Operating time of the valve in seconds. The operating time 3 3
for the valve calculation must be set exactly.

4 214 513 / 04 115


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


07-025 Min. valve setting 0% 0 100 This parameter sets the minimum valve stroke in %. 3 3
The functions of return or power limitation do not have any
influence.
This minimum valve stroke is only undershot if there is a
switch-off condition such as the summer switch-off or if the
maximum flow temperature is exceeded.
The zero point must be set first before the minimum valve
stroke can be commissioned. I.e. after the parameters have
been set, the valve closes during the set period (07-024).
Following this, the minimum valve stroke in % must be
tested in the relay test and checked with the flow rate mea-
surement on the heat meter.
07-110 Stpt. incr. (offset) flow stpt. 0K -90.0 90.0 Setpoint incr. (offset) flow setpoint heating 3 3
heating
07-112 Stpt. reduc. (offset) flow stpt. 0K -90.0 90.0 Setpoint red. (offset) flow setpoint heating 3 3
heating
07-113 Message room deviation 5K 0 30 Setting possibility of the deviation magnitude for generating 3 3
a message
07-114 Message room delay 120min 0 1440 Setting possibility of the delay time. With value “0” the check 3 3
is deactivated.
20-125 Power station 0 0 1 Showing/activation of the energy centre 0 0
on the control module

Heating circuit .. – time programs (only for readout)


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
00-500 ID current day program 0 0 14 0 6
00-502 Current day program name All day 0 0 0 6
00-503 Display status 0 0 255 0 6
00-504 Current week program ID 0 0 13 0 6
00-505 Current week program name Week 1 0 0 0 6
02-010 Party timer heating operation 0h 0.0 50.0 Calculated remaining time for party operation heating circuit 0 0
02-018 Absence remaining time 0h 0.0 50.0 0 0
03-078 Holiday end date 2036-02- 41214 65379 0 0
06

COOLING WILL COME LATER (graphics and


texts may already have shown the cooling.)

116 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.2.3 Heating characteristic


The heating circuit function regulates the room temperature of a heating zone in heating operation. The regulation of
the room temperature can be controlled by weather during heating and cooling by means of a heating characteristic,
with room control or mixed. Separate characteristics can be set for heating operation.

Heating characteristic:
VL (°C)

90

80
07-008 Flow maximum temperature
70

60

03-014 03-012 Configuration point


50 Heating curve from outside temperature
the design point 03-011 Base point
outside temperature
40 flow characteristic
07-008 Flow maximum temperature DK
30
03-013
Configuration point MK
20 flow temperature 03-001 Base point
heating characteristic flow temperature

10

0 AT (°C)

-16 -14 -12 -10 -8 -6 -4 -2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

Details of heating characteristic:


With weather control, only the outside temperature and the heating characteristic determine the value of the flow tem-
perature. The basic setting of the characteristic is made using the location of the base point on the outside temperature
axis (03-011) and the corresponding flow temperature (03-001) as well as the location of the configuration point on the
outside temperature axis (03-012) and its flow-temperature (03-013).

Outdoor temperature for heating characteristic curve:


The averaged outside temperature heating circuit and the averaged long-term value are equally averaged for deter-
mining the flow temperature using the heating characteristic curve:
OT-HC = (OTwAV + OT-avge) / 2

16
Outside temperature average value
14 Current outside
temperature
12

10
Outside temperature

10 h average value
8 24 h average value

0
00:00 06:00 12:00 18:00 00:00 06:00 12:00 18:00 00:00
Time
For light construction (low heat capacity), a time constant of 5 -10 hours is recommended, while for a heavy construc-
tion (high heat capacity), 20 – 30 hours are recommended.
The points are set for a reference room temperature of 20 °C (planning values). If the heating controller has not
switched off, a minimum
For light construction flow
(low heat temperature
capacity), (07-002)
a time constant of 5is-10
in hours
effect.is recommended, while for a heavy
construction (high heat capacity), 20 – 30 hours are recommended.

The points
4 214 513 /are
04set for a reference room temperature of 20 °C (planning values). If the heating controller has not 117
switched off, a minimum flow temperature (07-002) is in effect.
According to the set room temperature reference values and the operation selection (03-050), the control
Function modules and control functions

According to the set room temperature reference values and the operation selection (03-050), the control determines
the current reference values for the flow temperature.
With the comfort ID (03-058), the required room temperature can be increased temporarily. At the next time switching
point, the set comfort is reset.
The level of the flow reference temperature is limited by the maximum flow limit (07-008).

10.2.4 Screed drying


The screed drying function allows the function of each heating circuit used for drying out screed floors to be set sep-
arately.

To start the screed drying, it is necessary for the individual functions to be set accordingly.

Function Parameters Value Description


Heating-up phase 04-061 5 K/d Kelvin per day (rising)
Stabilisation temperature 04-063 40.0 °C Set maximum temperature
Inertia phase 04-064 10 Number of days in stabilisation temperature
Cooling off phase 04-062 -5 K/d Kelvin per day (falling)
Activate screed function 04-060 1 (ON) Start and stop screed drying

Information
Remaining run time screed function 02-019 … days Forecast in days

CAUTION
! The graphic/table shows the factory settings. The time profile and the maximum flow temperature must be
discussed with the screed layer, otherwise there could be damage to the screed – and in particular, crack

REACTION screed function


• Start/stop: datapoint 04-060 switch ON (1) or OFF (0)
• Power failure in heating-up phase: program restart
• Failure in the inertia phase: Retain maximum temperature and add the failure time to the inertia phase
• Power failure in the cooling off phase: Measurement of actual flow value and continue cooling until start value reached
• Program end: Previous basic program active again

The information finger is displayed on the main screen during screed drying.
Furthermore, pressing the i symbol allows information to be requested about the remaining runtime, the active function
phase and the current flow temperature.

118 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.2.5 Basic programs

Setting Basic program Function


0 Standby The heating circuit controls to the room frost protection temperature (03-000)
Holiday

The heating limit for frost protection operation is calculated:


with room temperature; According to (03-023) frost limit outside temperature
without RA-T; room frost protection temp. – dT HL (5°C -3K = 2°C)
dT HL = (NormTemp. – heating limit normal operation) e.g. 20°C – 17°C = 3K dT HG (HL=Heating limit)

Setting Basic program Function


1 Automatic The heating circuit controls according to the room reference values set in the
(week 1 or 2) time program.
4 Normal operation The heating circuit controls to the room normal temperature
(Constant or party) (03-051 heating operation) / (03-054 cooling operation)
5 Eco mode The heating circuit controls to the room economy temperature
or absent til (03-053 heating operation) / (03-056 cooling operation)

The heating limit is calculated based on the effective room reference value – dT HL, dT-HL = (NormTemp. – heating
limit normal operation) e.g. 20°C – 17°C = 3K
Means at an economy temperature of 16°C -3K = heating limit 13°C

Setting Basic program Function


6 Summer operation The heating circuit controls to the room frost protection temperature (03-000)
7 Manual operation The heating circuit controls to the set reference temperature (07-009) for ma-
heating nual operation.
8 Manual operation The heating circuit controls to the set reference temperature (07-009) for ma-
cooling nual operation.

10.2.6 Heating-up optimisation


The room temperature reference value is set to normal temperature depending on the holder-back time (03-006) befo-
re the programmed heating-up switching point. The heating-up hold-back time specifies the heating-up time for raising
the room temperature by 5 K at -10°C outside temperature. For slow-response underfloor heating systems, this is
about 200 to 400 minutes. For radiator systems, it is accordingly 100 to 200 minutes. The effective current hold-back
time is calculated from the outside temperature and the room temperature deviation. If no room temperature is active,
the calculation only uses the outside temperature.

4 214 513 / 04 119


Function modules and control functions

10.2.7 Outside temperature heating limit


(Setting the heating limit)
(03-021) determines when the heating circuit control is switched off. An averaged outdoor temperature value is calcu-
lated for the heating limit switch-off. The time constant (03-019) can be set if necessary.

16
Outside temperature average value
14

12
Outside temperature

Current outside
10 temperature
10 h average value
8

4 24 h average value

0
00:00 06:00 12:00 18:00 00:00 06:00 12:00 18:00 00:00
Time

(03-021)-0.5 K 03-021

Heating on
ΦOT °C
Heating off
Heating limit deactivation

With the setting, the heating limit is determined for a basic room temperature of 20 °C. If the average outside tempera-
ture exceeds the value, the heating switches off whereas if the average outside temperature drops by 0.5 K under the
set value, the heating switches back on. If the value is set below 2 °C, frost protection is activated.

If the reference room temperature is adjusted by the operation selection or comfort, the cooling limit automatically
adjusts. The difference between the room reference temperature and heating limit (03-021) is retained.

Example: setting par-heating limit outside temperature 03-021: 17 °C,


Room reference value: 20 °C produces heating limit 17 °C
Room reference value: 22 °C produces heating limit 19 °C

10.2.8 Special heating limit (auto eco mode)


In automatic operation (week 1 or week 2), a separate eco mode heating limit (03-002) can be set. This means that
in automatic eco mode (room reference <= 16 °C) can be set lower in well insulated buildings than would be the case
with the automatic heating limit. As a result, it is possible to achieve that, in automatic economy operation, the heating
is switched off during economy operation. This heating limit is also effective when absence function is activated. If the
setting is in the negative range, the outside temperature frost protection function provides for frost safety.

120 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.2.9 Special heating limits (flow reference value)


Another heating limit is derived from the flow temperature reference value. If the reference value drops below the set-
ting value of the current room reference temperature plus flow reference value heating limit (03-008), heating operation
switches off. This means if the flow reference value drops due to a high current outside temperature and is below the
set threshold, the heating switches off although the heating limit deactivation has not yet been reached. If the reference
value increases by 2 K again, heating control returns to operation.

FL reference value [°C]

30

25 Rsetp+(03-008)+ 0.5 K
Rsetp+(03-008)

20

15

10 OT[°C]

14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30

10.2.10 Deactivation when plant temperature is too low


Heating circuits can be switched off depending on the available plant temperature. If the plant temperature drops
below the required heating circuit “flow temperature reference”, the heating circuit can switch off under certain cir-
cumstances. The deactivation takes place if an adjustable minimum plant temperature is undershot or an adjustable
temperature difference between the plant temperature and the flow reference temperature is undershot.

TVA [°C]

100

Temperature difference system temperature –


80 heating circuit reference value

03-111

60
Minimum system
flow temperature

40
03-110

20
Heating circuit switched off
Tvsetp
[°C]

20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

The plant temperature is different depending on the application:


+ Buffer sensor
+ Plant flow sensor
+ H-Gen sensor

4 214 513 / 04 121


Function modules and control functions

(03-110) Minimum plant temperature


If the plant temperature drops below the calculated flow reference temperature, the heating is switched off. If the plant
temperature increases by 2 K again, heating control returns to operation.

(03-111) Plant temp switch-off difference


If the plant temperature drops below the calculated flow reference temperature plus setting value, the heating is swit-
ched off. If the plant temperature difference increases by 2 K again, heating control returns to operation.

10.2.11 Room temperature compensation


In room temperature compensation, the magnitude of the flow reference temperature is influenced by the room tem-
perature. For this purpose, a valid room temperature must be available. This can be obtained by a control module with
corresponding circuit assignment.

The reference flow temperature is influenced by setting a room influence. If the room temperature is too high, this
causes the flow reference temperature to be reduced. If the room temperature is too low, this causes a corresponding
increase. The magnitude of the correction is set using room temperature compensation (03-007).
(03-007)*room temperature deviation = flow reference value correction
The room influence should be set between 2 and 5 for low-temperature systems and between 4 and 8 for high-tem-
perature systems.

Example:
Room reference: 20 °C
Room actual: 17 °C
Deviation: 3K
Room temperature compensation (03-007): 2 K
RT compensation (03-007) x RT deviation = flow reference value correction
2 x 3 = 6K flow reference value shift

10.2.12 Room temperature heating limits


If a room influence (03-007) greater than 0 is set and there is a valid room temperature, superordinate heating limits
are set by the room temperature. If the room temperature rises too high, the heating circuit controller switches off. As
a corollary, the heating control can start operation if the room temperature drops too low when outside temperature
heating limit deactivation is active.

TI reference value [°C]

23,5

03-42
23 ½*03-42
Room
Reference
22,5 temperature
value cooling
22

21,5 ½*03-41
03-26 03-41
21 ½*03-26

20,5

Reference
20
value heating
19,5 ½*03-25 03-25

19

18,5
Forced Forced
Heating free Heating Off Heating free
heating heating

Cooling Off Cooling free Forced cooling Cooling free Cooling Off
t

122 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

With “forced”, the controller also enters heating or cooling operation if the outside temperature heating limit has swit-
ched off.

With “off”, the controller switches off even if the outside temperature heating or cooling limit is still enabling operation.

With “free”, the outside temperature heating or cooling limit determines the operating mode of the controller.
For the room temperature heating limits, a room temperature average value is calculated with a time constant of 0.5
hours.

The deviation for “forced heating” from the heating reference value can be set with the switch-on heating limit (03-025).
The corresponding switching difference for “forced heating” off corresponds to half of the switch-on heating limit.

The deviation for “heating off” from the heating reference value can be set with the switch-off heating limit (03-026).
The corresponding switching difference for “heating free” corresponds to half of the switch-off heating limit.

The deviation for “forced cooling” from the cooling reference value can be set with the switch-on cooling limit (03-042).
The corresponding switching difference for “forced cooling” off corresponds to half of the switch-on cooling limit.

The deviation for “cooling off” from the cooling reference value can be set with the switch-off cooling limit (03-041). The
corresponding switching difference for “cooling free” corresponds to half of the switch-off cooling limit.

10.2.13 Heating circuit control


The heating circuit is controlled by a pump or a pump with mixer. In a mixer circuit, the flow temperature is controlled.
In a pump circuit, the heating is only switched on and off by means of the heating limits. The flow temperature is de-
termined by the heat generation.

The heating circuit type can be set with 07-005. The cooling function is activated with 07-014.

Heating circuit type:


0 3-point mixer
1 2-point mixer (thermal drive)
2 Pump circuit
4 0-10V / 0-20mA activation via VA1
5 0-10V activation via VA3
6 0-10V activation via VA4
7 0-10V activation via VA5

Cooling function:
1 Cooling on, mixer closed
2 Cooling on, mixer open
3 Cooling on, mixer controlled on cooling reference value

With mixer control, the mixer drive can be a reversing motor with open and closed commands or a thermal mechanism
with only one open command.

If the cooling function is activated, a cooling valve can be activated with active cooling, depending on the version.

4 214 513 / 04 123


Function modules and control functions

10.2.14 Control strategy


The flow reference value of the heating circuit is selected here.

Control strategy 03-032:


0: Weather control only
1: Weather control with room override
2: Room control only
3: Constant control (e.g. ventilation override, ...)

10.2.15 Setpoint requirement type heating circuit


This determines where the reference value request of the heating circuit is forwarded to.

Setpoint requirement type heating circuit 07-035:


0: None
1: H-Gen/DH
2: Heating buffer
5: H-Gen/DH + local
6: Heating buffer + local
In 5 and 6, the reference value is additionally sent to the local primary valve in the “DH” application type – e.g. so as
to implement networks which do not (!) extend beyond one building, with several lines.

10.2.16 Pump control


The circulating pump runs continuously in heating operation. After heating operation switches off, the mixer control
continues to run for the set after-run time (07-003).

10.2.17 Mixer control


The mixer control takes place using a PI-controller (proportional-integral controller). The PI-controller consists of 2
parts, a P-portion and an I-portion. Consequently, this combines the advantage of the P-controller, namely a fast res-
ponse, with the advantage of the I-controller, namely precise control. The PI-control circuit is thus exact and fast. For
the P-proportion, it is possible to set the P-band (07-021), for the I-proportion the adjusting time (07-020) and for the
sampling interval the operating time (07-022 controller operating time) for each control loop.

10.2.18 Forced energy


The mixer controller can be force-controlled. Heat generator controllers can close the mixer controller for TTE pro-
tection, or force heat consumption if the TTE maximum temperature is exceeded. The flow maximum temperature is
not exceeded in this case. Equally, hot water charging controllers can generate forced energy and close the mixer
controllers or reduce the flow temperature.
By selecting forced energy (07-034), it is possible to set whether the heating circuit should react to positive, negative,
both or none.

0 = No reaction to forced energy


1 = Reaction to neg. forced energy
2 = Reaction to pos. forced energy.
3 = Reaction to pos. and neg. forced energy.

With a negative forced energy, the heating circuit pump switches – 100% off with activated mixer circuit as in the pump
circuit with forced energy, and is subsequently released again at – 50%.
The heating circuit status display shows forced throttling if the negative forced energy is < -50%.

10.2.19 Stand protection


To prevent the pump from seizing, a stand protection cycle is switched on daily during off operation. In each case, the
pump switches on for 30 seconds at 12:00 noon.
The mixer opens at each 12:00 noon for 10 seconds and then closes for 20 seconds.

124 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.2.20 Plausibility test


The plausibility check can be set with parameters 01-213 and 01-214.

10.2.21 External constant requirement heating (ventilation, swimming pool, …)


If a request contact has been defined with a heating circuit, the control strategy is additionally set to constant control.
The heating circuit now no longer responds to the request contact.
This means operating modes, switching times of the heating circuit no longer have any effect.
Input open: Heating circuit switches off, no frost protection or standby (preventive measures must be pro-
vided by the customer)
Input closed: Heating circuit operates at its set constant temperature

Parameters Setting UN Function Par-ID


Allocation ext. constant req. input
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, Heating
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- circuit …
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 … - configuration 30-046
Control strategy (selection of flow reference value determination)
0: Weather control only
1: Weather control with room override Heating
2: Room control only circuit ...
3: Constant control 3 - parameters 03-032
Heating
circuit ...
Flow reference value with constant requirement heating … °C parameters 07-036
Heating
Flow maximum temperature (set higher if required, factory setting = circuit ...
70 °C) … °C parameters 07-008
Heating
circuit ...
Allocate function name for heating circuit (e.g. ventilation, …) 10 - function name 04-005
VE1 and VE2 can also be configured as 0–10 V or 4–20 mA and VE8 33-001
and VE9 as 0–10 V, temperature (PT1000, KTY, PTC) inputs or volt- General ... to
free contact. sensors 33-004

Note: Several heating circuits can each be allocated to the same input as well.

Example of a parameterisation of 0–10 V requirement for a secondary controller:

30-046 Allocation input ext. constant request select the input, example 14=VE1
03-032 Set the control strategy to constant control
07-008 Set the pre-flow maximum temperature to 70°C, for example
07-036 Set to 100°C, for example; i.e. 10 V corresponds to approx. 100°C where the temperature is limited at 70°C
(parameter 07-008).
33-001 Set VE1 to 0–10 V

Notice: The HC pump is switched on, for example, at 0–10 V when the required setpoint is >5°C. If the setpoint falls to
<5°C, the HC pump is switched off.

Caution: An frost protection monitoring system must be guaranteed externally

4 214 513 / 04 125


Function modules and control functions

10.2.22 Minimum value override


It is also possible to set a minimum value override for the heating circuit.
The heating circuit works according to its heating curve or its reference value. When the minimum value override is
activated, the heating circuit moves at least to the set “Reference value minimum value override”. If the request for the
heating circuit reference value is higher, for example, it is retained. The minimum value override operates indepen-
dently from the currently active operating mode.
Example: The heating circuit is in standby. The minimum value override is active – the heating circuit starts operation
and controls the reference value minimum value override.
Input open: Heating circuit works according to its set heating curve or its constant value
Input closed: Reference value minimum value override is additionally active

Parameters Setting UN Function Par-ID


Allocation input minimum value override
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-
FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2,
21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, 25=VE2-FE3, Heating
26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, circuit …
31=VE10V-FE4 … - configuration 30-030
Heating circuit
Flow setpoint min. value override … °C ... parameters 07-039

Note: Several heating circuits can each be allocated to the same input as well.

10.2.23 Switching modem contact heating (telephone contact)


If an input has been defined as a switching modem contact in a heating circuit, the following control behaviour results.
Input open: AUTO
Input closed: STANDBY (frost protection function is active)

Parameters Setting UN Function Par-ID


Allocation switching modem contact input
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3, Heating
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- circuit …
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 … - configuration 30-045
Note: Several heating circuits can each be allocated to the same input as well. (also applies to the DHW circuit)

126 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.2.24 Room thermostat


If an input has been defined as a room thermostat contact in a heating circuit, the following control behaviour results.
Input open: STANDBY (frost protection function is active)
Input closed: AUTO

Parameters Setting UN Function Par-ID


Input allocation
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- Heating circuit
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 … - configuration 30-047

Note: Several heating circuits can each be allocated to the same input. (also applies to the DHW circuit)

4 214 513 / 04 127


Function modules and control functions

10.3 Function group „hot water“


In the “Hot water” function group, values must be set and settings made that are required for two independent hot
water functions.

10.3.1 Overview of menu structure “hot water”


Function group
(FunctionGroup 2)

Hot water
(FunctionGroupName)

Function Operation
(FunctionNumber 0) (DisplayGroup)

Hot water 1
(FunctionName) Information
Hot water 1
(DefaultValue)

Function
name
Function
(FunctionNumber 1)

Hot water 2
(FunctionName) Configuration
Hot water 2
(DefaultValue)

Parameters

Function
(FunctionNumber 2)

Hot water 3 Time


(FunctionName)
programmes
Hot water 3
(DefaultValue)

Commis-
sioning
Function
(FunctionNumber 3)

Hot water 4
(FunctionName)

Hot water 4
(DefaultValue)

128 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.3.2 Parameter overview „hot water 1-4“


Both hot water functions are equipped with equivalent functions. The overview below relates to “hot water 1”, for ex-
ample.

Hot water .. – information


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
02-052 Status domestic hot water control 0 0 0 Status domestic hot water control: 0 7
0 = Switched off
1 = Normal charging mode
2 = Comfort charging mode
3 = Force throttling (with electric heating element force
< -50%)
4 = Force charging (with electric heating element force
> +50%)
5 = Fault
6 = DHW draw-off (DHW draw-off active)
7 = Warning
8 = Reduced charging mode
9 = Frost protection
20 = Legionella
21 = DHW post operation
22 = DHW holiday operation
01-004 Hot water setpoint xxx °C 0.0 0.0 Calc. setpoint for the hot water temp. 0 7
00-004 Hot water actual SF xxx °C 0.0 0.0 Hot water actual SF 0 7
00-006 Hot water actual SF2 xxx °C 0.0 0.0 Hot water temp. 2 (switch-off temp.) 0 7
01-066 SLP1 hot water charging pump 0 0 1 0 7
01-067 SLP2 hot water charging pump 0 0 1 0 7
29-050 Energy xxxMWh -- -- Display heat quantity 0 7
29-051 Output xxxkW -- -- Display output 0 7
00-118 Circulation circuit temperature xxx °C 0.0 0.0 tDisplay circulation temperature 0 7
01-065 Hot water recirculation pump 0 0 1
00-117 BW storage tank circuit temp. xxx °C 0.0 0.0 DHW secondary charging temperature 2 7
00-116 DHW mixer circuit temperature xxx °C 0,0 0,0 Assigned flow temperature DHW 2 7

Hot water – function name


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
04-005 Function name -- -- -- Hot water function name 0 0

Hot water – configuration


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
05-076 Function application domestic hot 0 0 6 Function application type hot water, assignment setting 0 3
water of function expansions
0=inactive
1=active on basic board
2=active FE1
3=active FE 2
4=active FE3
5=active FE4
6=active FE5
30-032 Alloc. switching modem contact 0=OFF Allocation switching modem contact input (open = auto- 3 3
DHW input matic, bridged = standby)
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-
FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-
FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
32-031 Alloc. electrical heating insert out- 0=OFF Assignment output electric immersion heater 6 6
put 0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWauf, 3=YFWzu, 4=MK1,
5=YK1auf, 6=YK1zu, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4

4 214 513 / 04 129


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


30-031 Alloc. blocking contact ELH input 0=OFF Allocation input blocking contact electric immersion 6 6
heater (DHW recharging)
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-
FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-
FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
32-032 Alloc. recirculation pump ZKP out- 0=OFF Allocation circulation pump DHW-ZKP output 3 3
put 0=OFF, 1=DKP, 2=YFWopen, 3=YFWclosed, 4=MK1,
5=YK1open, 6=YK1closed, 7=SLP1, 8=SLP2, 9=VA2,
13=VA1-FE1, 14=VA2-FE1, 15=VA3-FE1, 16=VA1-FE2,
17=VA2-FE2, 18=VA3-FE2, 19=VA1-FE3, 20=VA2-FE3,
21=VA3-FE3, 22=VA1-FE4, 23=VA2-FE4, 24=VA3-FE4
30-021 Alloc. circulation sensor ZF input 0=OFF Allocation circulation sensor ZF input 3 3
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF1, 6=SF2,
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-
FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-
FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
32-045 Tank operation return limitation 0 0 1 Tank operation return limitation 3 3

30-049 Sensor no. 1 0 2 Number of tank sensors 3 3

30-050 Alloc. MBusUnit 0 0 255 Allocation of the heat meter 3 3


30-051 Alloc. inp. post-ctrl. sensor VFW 0=OFF 0 31 0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF2, 6=SF2, 3 3
7=VE3, 8=VE4, 9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8,
13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2, 16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1,
18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-FE2, 21=VE2-
FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-
FE4, 29=VE2-FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4
30-052 Alloc. inp. external reference 0=OFF 0 9 Allocation input external reference value 0= OFF, 1=
value VE1, 2= VE2, 3= VE8, 4= VE9, 5=VE10V-FE1, 6=
VE10V-FE2, 7= VE10V-FE3, 8= VE10V-FE4, 9= VE10V-
FE5

Hot water .. – parameters


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
05-087 Reference value request type hot 1 0 2 Reference value request type domestic hot water: 3 3
water 0:none
1:H-Gen/DH
2: Heating buffer
5: H-Gen/DH + local
6: Heating buffer + local
05-089 Allocation plant flow control 0 0 32 Allocation plant flow control 3 3
1-8 = H-Gen/DH 1 to 8
17-32 = HC/DHW 1 to 16
33-37 = internal pre-regulation circuit, TTE FW FE module
expansions
Example: Allocated PFC module: HC/DHW with DIP switch
addr. 9 = 25
05-000 Switch-on diff. hot water supply 2.5 K 0.5 20.0 If the hot water temperature drops below its reference value 3 3
by the value set here, hot water charging is started.
05-001 Charging setpoint elevation 5K -10.0 50.0 This parameter enables an increase for the charging refe- 3 3
rence value to be set.
05-002 Hot water loading preference 0.0 h 0.0 10.0 This setting enables the charging preference to be set 3 3
0 = Absolute precedence, the heating circuits are blocked
by forced energy
0.1 = Absolute parallel operation, no forced energy
Greater than 0.1 = ramp time in which the charging tempe-
rature should be reached. Forced energy is generated if the
charging temperature cannot follow the ramp.

130 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


05-003 Follow-on time DHW charging 0 min 0 60 After the setpoint temperature has been reached, the DHW 3 3
charging continues to run for the time set here.
05-019 Lead time DHW switching valve 6 6
05-004 Legionella prot. temperature 65°C 60 80 Legionella prot. temperature 3 3
05-005 DHW discharge 2 0 3 The following modes can be selected for charging pump 3 3
protection/charging stop control
0 = Temperature-independent
1 = Temperature-dependent, the charging pump is only
enabled if the charging flow is higher than the hot water
temperature.
2 = corresponds to 0
3 = corresponds to 1

Remark: no charging cancellation is carried out with


TTE-FW.
05-006 Circulation pump function 0 0 1 With the setting, the circulation pump function can be 3 3
activated:
0 = Inactive
1 = Active by time program with reference value forwarding
2 = Time program with temperature release and reference
value forwarding
3 = Time program with reference value forwarding and
speed control
4 = Active by time program without reference value forwar-
ding
5 = Time program with temperature release without referen-
ce value forwarding
6 = Time program without reference value forwarding and
speed control
7 = Active by time program with reference value forwarding
and pump switch-off
8 = Time program with temperature release, reference value
forwarding and pump switch-off
9 = Time program with reference value forwarding, speed
control and pump switch-off
10 = Active by time program without reference value forwar-
ding and pump switch-off
11 = Time program with temperature release without refe-
rence value forwarding and pump switch-off
12 = Time program without reference value forwarding with
speed control and pump switch-off
With the settings 7 to 12, the circulation pump is switched
off with DHW charging.
In this regard, please pay attention to the regulations and
the equivalent standards that apply in your country for hot
water and circulation.
05-011 Hot water charging mode 1 1 3 The following hot water modes can be set 3 3
1=Register
2=Charging module
3=Primary thermal
05-034 Charging setp. elev. mixer control 2.0K 0.0 20.0 Charging setpoint elevation mixer control 3 3
05-039 Forced energy choice 0 0 3 This parameter enables the response of the hot water circuit 3 3
to forced energy to be set:
0 = Hot water circuit does not respond to forced energy
1 = Responds to negative forced energy
2 = Responds to positive forced energy
3 = Responds to negative and positive forced energy
05-040 Error duration hot water fault 0h 0.0 20.0 If the hot water temperature drops below the reference 3 3
value by 5 K for longer than the time set here, an error
message is generated. Setting 0 = no error message is
generated
05-050 Hot water operation choice Week 1 Operation selection hot water function: 0 0
0 = Standby
1 = Week 1
2 = Week 2
4 = Constant normal mode
5 = Constant eco mode

4 214 513 / 04 131


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


05-051 Normal hot water temperature 55 °C 1.0 6.5 This parameter sets the hot water reference value. 0 0
05-052 Switch-on temp. DHW tank circuit 45°C 0 100 Switch-on temp. DHW tank circuit pump 3 3
pump
05-058 Sw-on temp. DHW tank circuit 5K 0 60 Sw-on temp. DHW tank circuit pump hyst. 3 3
pump hyst.
05-053 Tank circuit pump switch-on delay 10sec 0 300 Tank circuit pump switch-on delay
05-055 Heat exchanger max. temp. 70°C 20 90
anti-lime
05-056 DHW sensor 2 (SF 2) switch-off 0K 0.0 40.0 This parameter defines the switch-off differential from the 3 3
offset reference value for the end of the hot water charging on the
switch-off sensor.
05-057 Maximum hot water setpoint limit 90 °C 0 90 This parameter enables the setting range of the hot water 3 3
reference temperature (05-051) to be limited.
05-081 Maximum hot water charging 1.0 h 0.0 10.0 If the set maximum charging duration is exceeded, the 3 3
time charging procedure is interrupted and only started again if
the switch-on difference (05-00) from the current hot water
temperature is undershot.
05-083 Hot water charging interruption 0 . 2 0.0 10.0 Hot water charging interruption 3 3
hours
05-086 Conservation hot water tempe- 50°C 10 70 Conservation hot water temperature
rature
05-008 After-run time DHW charging 60sec 0 600 After-run time DHW charging pump (SLP1) 3 3
pump
05-009 After-run time service water 60sec 0 600 After-run time service water pump (SLP2) 3 3
pump BWP
07-020 Adjusting time circulation 900sec 0 10000 Adjusting time circulation 3 3
07-021 P-band circulation 50K 0 200 P-band circulation 3 3
05-049 Stand protection DHW charging 1 0 1 Stand protection DHW charging pump 3 3
pump
05-078 Stpt. incr. (offset) DHW stpt. 0K -80 80 Setpoint incr. (offset) hot water setp. 3 3
05-079 Stpt. reduc. (offset) DHW stpt. 0K -80 0 Setpoint red. (offset) hot water setp. 3 3
08-079 DHW min. temp with solar active 40°C 0 60 In intensive solar charging, the hot water setpoint tempera- 4 4
ture for recharging by the heat generator is reduced by the
set value.
05-017 Legionella protection mode 0 0 8 Mode 0 = No legionella protection circuit 3 3
Mode 1 = Legionella protection circuit active. Charging
through with «Legionella protection temperature» up to SF2
incl. after-run time.
Mode 2 = Mode 1 active - in addition, the «Legionella
protection temperature circulation» must be reached on the
circulation sensor
Mode 3 = Legionella protection circuit active. Charging
through until the «Legionella protection temperature» is
reached on the DHW return sensor
Mode 4 = Mode 3 active - in addition, the «Legionella
protection temperature circulation» must be reached on the
circulation sensor

Modes 5 to 8 correspond to modes 1 to 4 with, in addition to


the set time, a legionella protection function (charging up to
SF2) is carried out.
05-014 Legionella protection day 0 0 7 Setting possibility of the week day when legionella protecti- 3 3
on is switched on
0 = Daily
1–7 = Mon–Sun (Example 2 = Tuesday, 3 = Wednesday…)
05-015 Legionella protection time 10,0h 00,0 23,9 Setting possibility of the start time when legionella protecti- 3 3
on is switched on
05-016 Legionella prot. temperature 60°C 0 80 Setting possibility of the legionella protection temperature in 3 3
circulation the circulation temperature sensor
05-099 Mode charging pump speed 0 0 10 Charging pump mode speed in hydraulic application 59 3 3
Mode 0 = RLF to SF2
Mode 1 = SF1 to SF2

132 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W


05-100 P-band ch. pump RT 5K 0,1 200 P-band to function according to parameter 05-099 3 3
05-101 Differential set ch. pump RT 10K 0,1 100 Differential charging pump RT setpoint to function 05-099 3 3
05-102 P-band ch. pump FL 10K 0,1 200 P-band charging pump VL to hydraulic application 59, 60, 3 3
61
05-103 Adjusting time ch. pump FL 300sec 0 10000 Adjusting time charging pump VL to hydraulic application 3 3
59, 60, 61
05-105 Message circ set not reached 5K 0,1 25 Actual deviation for fault message 3 3
05-106 Delay message circ act. value 1h 0,1 24 Delay time for fault message 3 3
deviation
05-107 Flow rate DW 50l/min 0,1 6500 Nominal flow rate hydraulic application 61 3 3
05-108 P-factor DW 50% 1 300 Retroactive effect on controlled system hydraulic application 61 3 3
05-109 Option switching valve 0 0 1 Option switching valve aqua F DHW 3 3
0 = Inactive
1 = Active
01-116 Return max HP 55,0°C 0 70 Switch-off temperature return HP with hydraulics 62 3 3
05-010 Release temperature recharging 70,0°C 30 70 If the hot water charging mode is set accordingly, this
parameter allows a recharging temperature to be set. If the
hot water temperature is higher than the set recharging tem-
perature, the charging request is switched off on the central
heat generator system and a hot water-internal charging is
switched on.

Hot water .. – time programs (only for readout)


Par. Designation Value Min. Max. Comments R W
00-500 ID current day program 0 0 14 0 6
00-502 Current day program name All day 0 0 0 6
00-503 Display status 0 0 255 0 6
00-504 Current week program ID 0 0 13 0 6
00-505 Current week program name Week 1 0 0 0 6
02-011 DHW party timer remaining time 0h 0.0 4.0 Calculated remaining time for party operation DHW 0 0
charging
02-018 Absence remaining time 1088.9 h 0.0 50.0 Absence remaining time 0 0
03-078 Holiday end 2036-02- 41214 65379 Holiday end 0 0
06

The functions of the hot water circuit can also be individually adapted – following a basic configuration by the hydraulic
application.

4 214 513 / 04 133


Function modules and control functions

10.3.3 Reference value request type hot water


The current reference value for the hot water temperature depends on the set reference values, the operation selection
and the time programs.
If there are heat generator faults and solar charging is integrated, the set reference value can be overridden.
Hot water charging is started if the current reference value is undershot by the switch-on difference (05-000) and ends
when the current reference value is reached.
The maximum hot water setpoint temperature that can be set can be limited with the parameter (05-057).
An after-run time can be set with 05-003, a reference value is sent on during this time.
After that, the SLP1 and SLP2 run without reference value request with the corresponding after-run times.
Overshoots: Overshoot charging reference value (05-001) increases the charging temperature compared to the refer-
ence DHW. If a PFC or pilot control is activated, this reference value is increased further compared to the heat gener-
ator by overshoot charging reference value mixer control (05-034).

SF reference value [°C]

60

SFsetp
55
05-000
50

45
Charging on

40 t

Hot water charging

Hot water charging


°C

Hot water charging


reference value
05-001

05-000

Hot water
Hot water
reference value
temperature

Reference value 05-008/05-009 Reference value


request incl. 05-003 Reference value request incl. 05-003 request incl. 05-003
Charging pump on Charging pump on Charging pump on

Legio reference Legio reference


t
value increase value increase

134 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.3.4 Reference value request type hot water


This determines where the reference value request of the hot water circuit is forwarded to.

Setpoint request type hot water 05-087:


0:none
1:H-Gen/DH
2: Heating buffer
5: H-Gen/DH + local
6: Heating buffer + local
In 5 and 6, the reference value is additionally sent to the local primary valve in the “DH” application type – e.g. so as
to implement networks which do not (!) extend beyond one building, with several lines.

10.3.5 DHW charging preference


With preferential charging (setting 05-002 = 0 h) only the set hot water charging output is requested. Equally, a ne-
gative forced energy is generated, by means of which other consumer circuits can be blocked.
With the setting 0.1 h, charging takes place in parallel to an additional request. No forced energy is generated in this
case and the requested output is not limited to the set hot water charging output.
With the setting > 0.1 h, the charging is carried out in parallel and a forced energy ramp is generated for the charging
temperature depending on load. If the charging temperature undershoots the ramp, a negative forced energy is gene-
rated. Heating circuits are enabled if the ramp temperature is reached.
The forced energy is related to the charging flow temperature.
This is different depending on the application:
+ Buffer sensor
+ Plant flow sensor
+ H-Gen sensor

DHW charging temperature


Load-dependent forced energy

Charging reference Forced


value DHW energy ramp
60

55

50

45 Charging
temperature

40 t

Hot water charging


Forced energy

0%
t
-100%

4 214 513 / 04 135


Function modules and control functions

10.3.6 Sensor number (configuration 30-049):


0 = Contact The storage tank is charged via a potential-free contact (on SF1) with the buffer storage temperature
(DHW-reference + charging setpoint elevation 05-001).
1 = One calorifier sensor The storage tank is charged with the buffer storage temperature (DHW-reference + charging setpoint
elevation 05-001) is the temperature is undershot (DHW-reference - switch-on difference 05-000), until
DHW-reference is reached on the sensor.
2 = Two calorifier sensors Charging as with one calorifier sensor, but charging finishes if DHW-reference – switch-off offset DHW
sensor 2 (05-056) is reached on the second calorifier sensor (SF2).

10.3.7 Hot water charging mode (parameter 05-011):


Coil The storage tank charging pump SLP1 is activated when there is a charging request if the discharge
protection (05-005) is deactivated or the discharge protection is activated and the assigned flow or
return temperature exceeds the upper storage tank temperature or the reference value request type
(05-087) is set to “none” or calorifier sensor is set to “0”
Charging module the SLP1 is switched as with a coil, the SLP2 is switched when the assigned flow or return temperature
rises above the “Switch-on temp. DHW storage tank circuit pump” (05-052) (if the value is “0”, a check
is performed whether the DHW reference value is exceeded). If the temperatures drop by a set hystere-
sis (05-058) then the SLP2 will be switched off again.
Primary thermal If there is a charging request, SLP1 and SLP2 are switched without temperature check (e.g. for using
thermal valves)
Coil + recharging As “Coil” but with recharging (parameter 05-010)
Charging module + recharging As “Charging module” but with recharging (parameter 05-010)

10.3.8 Allocation plant flow control – pilot control (parameter 05-089):


With setting 1..32, a PFC function is allocated to H-Gen, TTE-DH or HC/DHW. Setting 33..37 assigns a heating circuit
group of the corresponding TTE-DH to the DHW heat generator. This contains pump, mixer, flow sensor, return sensor
and corresponding mixer parameters. The reference value (H-Gen, buffer) continues to be forwarded from the DHW
heat generator.

10.3.9 Post-control (configuration 30-051):


When a post-control sensor is configured, an undershoot of the DHW storage temperature is increased by a reference
value request to the heat generator when charging is in progress. However, this function does not replace hydraulic
balancing of the charging module. This must be carried out in any event!

10.3.10 External reference value (configuration 30-052):


An analog input can be selected and the DHW-reference can be determined externally (from 0 °C to 05-057 – ma-
ximum hot water reference value limitation). This only applies if “Week 1” or “Week 2” operation has been selected.

10.3.11 Forced energy choice (parameter 05-039)


Similarly to the forced energy choice of the heating circuits, heat generator controllers can switch off the hot water
controller for H-Gen protection, or force heat consumption if the H-Gen maximum temperature is exceeded. The set
maximum temperature (05-057) is not exceeded here.

The forced energy can be configured with the parameter (05-039):


0 = No reaction to forced energy
1 = Reaction to neg. forced energy, i.e. the DHW setpoint temperature can be reduced
2 = Reaction to pos. forced energy, i.e. the DHW setpoint temperature can be increased
3 = Reaction to pos. and neg. forced energy

136 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

10.3.12 Return limitation domestic hot water


The tank operation return limitation (parameter 32-045) enables a return limitation to be activated for the correspon-
ding storage tank.
The outdoor temperature-dependent return curve is set under General / Configuration / Return temperature DHW at
-20°C and +20°C (01-203 and 01-204). The limitation factor is defined under 01-205.
This functions in the same way as the return limitation of the heating circuits.

The return temperature assigned to the DHW circuit is compared to this curve and, if exceeded, the DHW-reference
value is reduced.

The following allocations apply depending on the hydraulic connections example):

Condition Return curve Return temperature Flow temperature Note


FW, addr=1, Local Local RLF (return flow sen- Local VF (flow sensor, se-
DHW request type = H-Gen/ sor, primary return) condary flow)
DH, no pilot control
Addr=2..16, Local External return flow sensor External flow (from TTE-DH
DHW request type = H-Gen/ (from TTE-DH with addr 1) with addr 1)
DH, no pilot control, external
unit with addr1 = TTE-DH
Addr > 1, no TTE-DH as unit Local --- External flow (from H-Gen/DH No return limit possible
with addr 1 in the system with addr 1)
Requirement type = buffer Local -- External flow (from buffer) No return limit possible
Internal pre-regulation Local Return of the HC group Flow of the HC group
(LFC 33..37)

4 214 513 / 04 137


Function modules and control functions

10.3.13 Recirculation pump


Optionally, a recirculation pump function can be used.

Overview:
Parameters Factory UN Function Par-ID
Hot water..-
Allocation circulation sensor 0 - configuration 30-021
Hot water..-
Allocation recirculation pump output 0 - configuration 32-032
Recirculation pump behaviour
0=inactive
1 = Active by time program with reference value forwarding (optionally a circulation
sensor can be activated)
2 = Time program with temperature release and reference value forwarding
3 = Time program with reference value forwarding and speed control
4 = Active by time program without reference value forwarding
5 = Time program with temperature release without reference value forwarding
6 = Time program without reference value forwarding and speed control
7 = Active by time program with reference value forwarding and pump switch-off
during charging.
8 = Time program with temperature release, reference value forwarding and pump
switch-off during charging.
9 = Time program with reference value forwarding, speed control and pump switch-
off during charging.
10 = Active by time program without reference value forwarding and pump switch-
off during charging.
11 = Time program with temperature release, without reference value forwarding
and pump switch-off during charging.
12 = Time program without reference value forwarding, with speed control and
pump switch-off during charging.

Hot water..-
With the settings 7 to 12, the circulation pump is switched off with DHW charging. 0 - parameters 05-006
Circulation circuit release temp. (according to setting of circulation switching time Hot water
program) 45/10 °C switching prog.
Information
Hot water ..
Hot water circulation temperature °C Information 00-118
Hot water ..
Hot water recirculation pump - Information 01-065

With the settings 7 to 12, the circulation pump is switched off with DHW charging.

The circulation switching time program is taken into account in all settings – with a switching time value less than
15 °C, the pump is switched off.

If a temperature sensor is available for the circulation return, this can be additionally controlled with a temperature-de-
pendent function.

As soon as a speed control is activated, it is output to VA4 which cannot be changed and, as a result, only a circulation
with speed control is allowed to be activated on the controller.

In this regard, please pay attention to the regulations and the equivalent standards that apply in your country for hot
water and circulation.
Diagram: Axis: ZK-act, with 45° ZK-ref

138 4 214 513 / 04


Function modules and control functions

SAD ref

50 2.0 K

45

40

35
Circulation on

30 t

Recirculation pump

10.3.14 Switching modem contact (telephone contact)


If an input has been defined as a switching modem contact in a DHW circuit, the following control behaviour results.
Input open: AUTO
Input closed: STANDBY (frost protection function is active)

Parameters Setting UN Function Par-ID


Allocation switching modem contact input
0=OFF, 1=AF, 2=RLF, 3=VF, 4=VF1, 5=SF2, 6=SF2, 7=VE3, 8=VE4,
9=VE5, 10=VE6, 11=VE7, 12=VE8, 13=VE9, 14=VE1, 15=VE2,
16=VE1-FE1, 17=VE2-FE1, 18=VE3-FE1, 19=VE10V-FE1, 20=VE1-
FE2, 21=VE2-FE2, 22=VE3-FE2, 23=VE10V-FE2, 24=VE1-FE3,
25=VE2-FE3, 26=VE3-FE3, 27=VE10V-FE3, 28=VE1-FE4, 29=VE2- Hot water
FE4, 30=VE3-FE4, 31=VE10V-FE4 … - configuration 30-032

Note: Several DHW/heating circuits can each be allocated to the same input as well.

4 214 513 / 04 139


iken und deren Einstellungen erläutert. Die Ladesysteme können in allen Systemen mit Wärmeerzeugern
men und beziehen sich nicht nur auf Fernwärmesysteme.
Charging systems:

.1. 11. Charging


Hydraulik systems:
59_TransTherm aqua L
Various charging systems and a fresh water module can be activated using the TTE-DH controller by means of adjus-
table hydraulic applications (hydraulic 59 to 61). The following chapter explains the corresponding hydraulic functions
and their settings. The charging systems can occur in all systems with heat generators and do not just relate to district
heating systems.

11.1 Hydraulic 59_TransTherm aqua L

“Technical” description of function


sche“ Charging
Funktionsbeschreibung
operation with automatic output adjustment:
ieb mit The
automatischer Leistungsanpassung:
primary heating side has pilot control by the HC1 (PFC33) via a 3-point control system (YFW) and the feed pump
r-Heizungsseite wird
(SLP1/DKP). vom HK1 (AVR33) über ein 3-Punkt Regelventil (YFW) und der Zubringerpumpe (SLP1/DKP) vorgeregelt.

eizkreis This heating


ist aktiv, circuit
sobald eine is active as soon as anliegt.
Sollwertanforderung there is a reference value request.
The reference
ertanforderung entstehtvalue
durchrequest comes from an
eine Speicherladung a storage tank charging
Speicherfühler 1 (SF1) to storage
unter tank sensor 1 (SF1)
Warmwassersollwert minusunder domestic hot
Einschaltdifferenz
water Par.
sserbereitung reference value
05-000, oderminus switch-on hysteresis domestic hot water heating par. 05-000 or a circulation request.
einer Zirkulationsanforderung.
This reference value (DHW reference value + exceeding charging reference value par. 05-001 + exceeding charging
llwert (WW-Sollwert + Überhöhung
reference value Ladesollwert
mixer control Par. can
par. 05-034) 05-001
now + Überhöhung
be passed onLadesollwert Mischerregelung
via the Hoval Par. 05-034
CAN bus system to the )Hoval
kann nun
heat
Hoval CAN-Bussystem an den Hoval Wärmeerzeuger oder über 0-10V, 4-20mA
generator or via 0-10 V, 4-20 mA (via VA1) to other heat generators. (über VA1) an andere Wärmeerzeuger
eben werden.
If the Hoval heat generator signals enable via the Hoval CAN bus system then the pilot control circuit HC1 becomes
r Hovalactive.
Wärmeerzeuger über das Hoval CAN-Bussystem die Freigabe, wird der Vorregelkreis HK1 aktiv.
With other heat
en Wärmeerzeugern diegenerators
über 0-10V,that are requested
4-20mA angefordertvia 0-10 V,
werden, 4-20 mA,
schaltet thissofort
dieser switches
ein. on immediately.
When the enable temperature (DHW reference temperature or switch-on temperature DHW par. 05-052) is reached on
eichen der
theFreigabetemperatur
sensor VFW, RLF or (WW-Solltemperatur oder Einschalttemperatur
VFP, the process water pump SLP2 switches WWon.Par. 05-052) am
Discharge Fühler VFW,
protection RLF oder
(switch-on VFP
temp. DHW
ie Brauchwasserpumpe SLP2
storage tank circuit ein. Der
pump Entladeschutz
hysteresis (Einschalttemp.
par. 05-058) hysteresisWW8KSpeicherkreispumpe Hysterese
is active in this case Par. switch
and would 05-058)the
Hysterese
process
bei aktivwater
und würde
pumpbei eineroff
SLP2 Temperaturunterbrechung die Brauchwasserpumpe
again in case of a temperature interruption. SLP2 wieder ausschalten.

Einschaltoptimierung.
Start-up/switch-on optimisation
hwasserpumpe SLP2water
The process fährt mit
pumpeiner Rampe
SLP2 von ca. 90toSekunden
accelerates aufpossible
the highest eine möglichst
speedhohe
with Drehzahl.
a ramp ofDiese wird90von
approx. der
seconds. This is
limited byDas
peratur begrenzt. thebedeutet,
chargingwenn
temperature. This means
die Ladetemperatur theerreicht
nicht pump speed
werdeniskann,
reduced if the
wird die charging temperature
Pumpendrehzahl reduziert.cannot be
wird mitachieved.
Parameter „P-Band Ladepumpe VL 05-102“ und „Nachstellzeit Ladepumpe VL 05-103“.
Control uses the “P-band charging pump VL 05-102” and “Reset time charging pump VL 05-103” parameters.
eichen der WW-Solltemperatur am Speicherfühler 1 (SF1) erfolgt die Drehzahlregelung der Brauchwasserpumpe SLP2 zusätzlich
Once the DHW temperature on the storage tank sensor 1 (SF1) has been reached, speed control of the process water
ameter „Modus Ladepumpe Drehzahl“ (05-099) wie folgt:
pump SLP2 additionally takes place according to the “Storage pump speed mode” parameter (5-099) as follows:

Mode 0:
If SF2 is below [RLF - “Differential set ch. pump RT 05-101” – “P_band charging pump RL 05-100”], SLP2 is controlled
at its maximum.
If SF2 is above [RLF - “Differential set ch. pump RT 05-101”], SLP2 is controlled at its minimum.
There is a straight line between these points.

V04 KDT140
TTE-FW DE_bearbeitung 05.05.2017_korr.docx 4 214140
513 / 04
/ 150
Charging systems:

Mode 1:
If SF2 is below [SF1 - “Differential set ch. pump RT 05-101” – “P_band charging pump RL 5-100”], SLP2 is controlled
at its maximum.
If SF2 is above [SF1 - “Differential set ch. pump RT 05-101”], SLP2 is controlled at its minimum.
There is a straight line between these points.

The charging temperature is also considered in both modes.

Discharge protection:
The discharge protection is deactivated ex-works in order to allow temporary commissioning at low system tempera-
tures.
This is done using parameter 0.0.33002 (General/Sensors/VE2 function) in position 4=DHW charging cancel and a
“jumper” on terminal +12 V to VE2.
A warning is displayed when the discharge protection is deactivated.
The discharge protection must be reactivated in the final commissioning!

Circulation mode:
For Aqua L, the circulation must be set to the default.
The circulation temperature is set using the time program special heating programs circulation.
Several circulating pump functions can be configured using parameter 05-006. The factory setting is configuration 3
(active after time program with reference value forwarding and speed control).
The process water pump SLP2 in the buffer storage circuit has an after-run time par. 05-009 (60 seconds), in order to
minimise limescale build-up in the heat exchanger.
The first heating circuit of the controller is active as pilot control circuit HC1 in circulation mode. The speed-controlled
recirculation pump SLP1 regulates the required circulation temperature at the circulation sensor RLFZ.

Legionella protection:
To protect against the build-up of legionella bacteria, the domestic hot water buffer storage tank is completely char-
ged through 1x daily (at the latest 23.5 h after the last charging finished). The complete charging through is ensured
because the temperature sensor RLF2 in the cold water line is located at the outflow of the domestic hot water buffer
storage tank.

Legionella protection circuit:


A legionella protection circuit can be set. The switching can be selected every day or every week. The legionella
temperature can be set between 65…70 °C. The necessary primary charging temperature must be 5 K above the
legionella temperature.

The legionella circuit is controlled according to parameter “Legionella protection mode” 05-017.

Mode 0 = No legionella protection circuit


Mode 1 = Legionella protection circuit active. Charging through with “Legionella protection temperature” up to SF2 incl.
after-run time.
Mode 2 = Mode 1 active - in addition, the “Legionella protection temperature circulation” must be reached on the cir-
culation sensor
Mode 3 = Legionella protection circuit active. Charging through until the “Legionella protection temperature” is reached
on the DHW return sensor incl. after-run time.
Mode 4 = Mode 3 active - in addition, the “Legionella protection temperature circulation” must be reached on the cir-
culation sensor.
Modes 5 to 8 correspond to modes 1 to 4 with, in addition to the set time, a legionella protection function (charging up
to SF2) is carried out.

General:
The temperatures of calorifier sensor 1 (SF1), calorifier sensor 2 (SF2), the return sensor for the cold water line
(RLF2), the return sensor for the heat exchanger (RLF) and the circulation filter (RLFZ) can be configured on the TTE
control module for analysis and evaluation purposes.

4 214 513 / 04 141


Charging systems:

Parameter settings for hydraulic 59


Par. Designation Value

General – configuration: 05-081 Maximum hot water charging time 10.0 h

Par. Designation Value 05-083 Hot water charging interruption 0.0 h


04-077 Hydraulic application 59 05-008 After-run time DHW_charging pump (SLP1) 60 sec
04-076 Function application general HC
05-009 After-run time process water pump BWP (SLP2) 60 sec
01-203 Return temperature DHW at -20 °C 60 °C
07-020 Adjusting time circulation 900 sec
01-204 Return temperature DHW at +20 °C 60 °C
07-021 P-band circulation 50.0 K
01-205 Factor return limitation 10 %
05-017 Legionella protection mode 1
Heating circuit 1, 33=PFC - parameters 05-014 Legionella protection day 0
Par. Designation Value
05-015 Legionella protection time 3
07-020 Adjusting time 15 sec (Siemens SAS31.03)
05-016 Legionella prot. temperature circulation 60 °C
07-021 P-band 25 K (Siemens SAS31.03)
05-099 Mode charging pump speed 0
07-022 Controller runtime 15 sec (Siemens SAS31.03)
05-100 P-band ch. pump RT 5K
07-023 Mixer calculation 2
05-101 Differential set ch. pump RT 10 K
07-024 Mixer running time 30 sec (Siemens SAS31.03)
05-102 P-band ch. pump FL 10 K

05-103 Adjusting time ch. pump FL 300 sec


Hot water 1 - configuration
05-104 Delay message DHW actual value deviation 5.0 h
Par. Designation Value
05-105 Notification circ. ref. not reached 5K
32-032 Alloc. recirculation pump ZKP output 7=SLP1
05-106 Delay message circ. actual value deviation 1h
30-021 Alloc. circulation sensor ZF input 11=VE7

32-045 Tank operation return limitation …

30-049 Sensor no. 2


Allocation:
Hot water 1 - parameters Designation schematic Connection controller
Par. Designation Value YFW: YFW
05-087 Reference value request type hot water 1:H-Gen/ SLP1: DKP
DH SLP2: SLP2
SLP2/0-10V: VA3
05-089 Allocation plant flow control 33
ZKP: SLP1
05-000 Switch-on diff. hot water supply 2.0 K ZKP/0-10V: VA 4
05-001 Charging setpoint elevation 3.0 K RLF: RLF
VFW: VF
05-002 Hot water loading preference 0.1h
SF1: SF1
05-004 Legionella prot. temperature 60 °C SF2: SF2
05-005 DHW discharge protection/charging stop 1 VFP: VE 5
RLFZ: VE 7
05-006 Circulating pump function 9 RLF2: VE 3
05-011 Hot water charging mode Charging
module VA1: Temperature request 0-10 V / 4-20 mA for external
05-034 Oversh. charging setpoint elevation mixer 10.0 K heat generator
control VE2: Discharge protection
05-050 Hot water operation choice Constant

05-051 Normal DHW temperature 57.0 °C

05-052 Switch-on temp. DHW storage tank circuit pump 60 °C


(SLP2)

05-058 Switch-on temp. DHW storage tank circuit pump 8K


hysteresis

05-053 Tank circuit pump switch-on delay 10sec

05-056 DHW sensor 2 (TS 2) switch-off offset 0.0 K

142 4 214 513 / 04


Charging systems:

11.2 Hydraulic 60_TransTherm aqua LS


11.2. Hydraulik 60_TransTherm aqua LS

“Technical” description of function

Charging operation with


Dieser Heizkreis primary
ist aktiv, sobald return cooling:
eine Sollwertanforderung anliegt.
The primary
Dieheating side has entsteht
Sollwertanforderung pilot control by Speicherladung
durch eine the HC1 (PFC33) via a 3-point
an Speicherfühler 1 (SF1)control system (YFW)minus
unter Warmwassersollwert and Einschaltdifferenz
the feed pump
Warmwasserbereitung Par. 05-000, bei aktiver Rücklaufauskühlung oder Zirkulationsanforderung.
(DKP).
Dieser Sollwert (WW-Sollwert + Überhöhung Ladesollwert Par. 05-001 + Überhöhung Ladesollwert Mischerregelung Par. 05-034 ) kann nun
This heating circuit
über is active
das Hoval as soonanas
CAN-Bussystem there
den Hovalis a referenceoder
Wärmeerzeuger value
überrequest.
0-10V, 4-20mA (über VA1) an andere Wärmeerzeuger
The reference value request
weitergegeben werden. comes from a storage tank charging on storage tank sensor 1 (SF1) under domestic hot
water reference value minus switch-on hysteresis domestic hot water heating par. 05-000, with active return cooling
or circulation request.
Meldet der Hoval Wärmeerzeuger über das Hoval CAN-Bussystem die Freigabe, wird der Vorregelkreis HK1 aktiv.
Bei anderen Wärmeerzeugern die über 0-10V, 4-20mA angefordert werden, schaltet dieser sofort ein.
This reference value (DHW reference value + exceeding charging reference value par. 05-001 + exceeding charging
reference value mixer control
Beim Erreichen par. 05-034)
der Freigabetemperatur can now be passed
(WW-Solltemperatur on via the Hoval
oder Einschalttemperatur WW Par.CAN busamsystem
05-058) toRLF
Fühler VF, theoder
Hoval
VFP heat
generator or via 0-10
schaltet V, 4-20 mA (viaSLP2
die Brauchwasserpumpe VA1) ein.toDer
other heat generators.
Entladeschutz Par. 05-052 Hysterese 5K ist dabei aktiv und würde bei einer
Temperaturunterbrechung die Brauchwasserpumpe wieder ausschalten.

If the HovalDieheat generator signals


Brauchwasserpumpe enable
SLP2 fährt viaRampe
mit einer the Hoval
von ca.CAN bus system
90 Sekunden auf 100%.then the pilot control circuit HC1 becomes
active. Nach Erreichen der WW-Solltemperatur am Speicherfühler 2 (SF2), schaltet die Ladung aus und wechselt in die Rücklaufauskühlung über.
With other Eine
heatDifferenzregelung
generators that are requested
zwischen via 0-10
dem Rücklauffühler V, 4-20
RLF auf mA, this switches
der Versorgerseite on immediately.
und dem Fühler RLF2 in der Kaltwasserleitung Ladekreis ist
aktiv.
Beispiel: Differenztemperatur > 7K Drehzahl 100%, Differenztemperatur < 4K Minimale Drehzahl der Brauchwasserpumpe.
When the enable temperature (DHW reference temperature or switch-on temperature DHW par. 05-058 is reached on
Der Anstieg/Reduktion der Drehzahl wird über eine Rampe begrenzt, Maximale Drehzahl 40%.
the sensor VF, RLF or VFP, the process water pump SLP2 switches on. The discharge protection par. 05-052 hystere-
sis 5 K is active in this casemitand
Zirkulationsbetrieb would switch the process water pump off again in case of a temperature interruption.
Primär-Rücklaufauskühlung:
Die Zirkulationstemperatur wird über das Schaltprogramm Sonderheizprogramme-Zirkulation eingestellt.
The Es water
process können pump
mehrereSLP2
Zirkulationspumpenfunktionen
accelerates to 100% über with
den Parameter
a ramp 05-006 konfiguriert
of approx. werden. Die Werkseinstellung ist die Konfiguration
90 seconds.
3 (Aktiv nach Zeitprogramm mit Sollwertweiterleitung u. Drehzahlregelung).
After the DHW reference temperature has been reached on the storage tank sensor 2 (SF2), the charging switches off
and changes oversich
Befindet to return
die Anlagecooling. A Rücklaufauskühlung,
nun in der differential control wirdbetween the return RLF
die Rücklauftemperatur cooler
des RLF on the supply
Wärmeübertragers side and
(Vorwärmer) sensor
möglichst
RLF2 in thegering
charging circuit
gehalten. Ist die cold water line is active.
Zirkulationstemperatur gemessen am RLFZ > der Rücklauftemperatur in der Kaltwasserleitung RLF2+4K, bleibt die
Example: Differential temperature
Brauchwasserpumpe > 7 K, speed
SLP2 eingeschaltet. of rotation
Ist die gemessene 100 %, differential
Zirkulationstemperatur RLFZtemperature < 4 K, minimum
< der Rücklauftemperatur speed
RLF2+2K, wird die of
Brauchwasserpumpe
rotation of the process water pumpSLP2 ausgeschaltet.

The increase/reduction in the speed of rotation is limited by a ramp, maximum speed of rotation 40%.
Die Brauchwasserpumpe SLP2 im Speicherladekreis hat eine Nachlaufzeit Par. 05-009 (60 Sekunden), um die
Verkalkung im Wärmeüberträger zu minimieren.

Im Zirkulationsbetrieb ist der Vorregelkreis HK1 aktiv. Die Drehzahlgeregelte Zirkulationspumpe ZKP regelt die gewünschte
Zirkulationstemperatur auf den Zirkulationsfühler RLFZ.

4 214 513 V04 KDT TTE-FW DE_bearbeitung 05.05.2017_korr.docx 143 / 150

4 214 513 / 04 143


Charging systems:

Circulation mode with primary return cooling:


The circulation temperature is set using the time program special heating programs circulation.
Several circulating pump functions can be configured using parameter 05-006. The factory setting is configuration 3
(active after time program with reference value forwarding and speed control).

If the plant is now in return cooling, the return temperature RLF of the heat exchanger (preheater) is kept as low as
possible. If the circulation temperature measured on RLFZ > the return temperature in the cold water line RLF2+4 K
then the process water pump SLP2 remains switched on. If the measured circulation temperature RLFZ < the return
temperature RLF2+2 K then the process water pump SLP2 is switched off.

The process water pump SLP2 in the buffer storage circuit has an after-run time par. 05-009 (60 seconds), in order to
minimise limescale build-up in the heat exchanger.

The pre-control circuit HC1 is active in circulation mode. The speed-controlled recirculation pump ZKP regulates the
required circulation temperature at the circulation sensor RLFZ.

Discharge protection:
The discharge protection is deactivated ex-works in order to allow temporary commissioning at low system tempera-
tures.
This is done using the parameter 0.0.33002 (General/Sensors/VE2 function) in position 4=DHW charging cancel and
a “jumper” on terminal +12 V to VE2.
A warning is displayed when the discharge protection is deactivated.
The discharge protection must be reactivated in the final commissioning!

Legionella protection:
To protect against the build-up of legionella bacteria, the domestic hot water buffer storage tank is completely char-
ged through 1x daily (at the latest 23.5 h after the last charging finished). The complete charging through is ensured
because the temperature sensor RLF2 in the cold water line is located at the outflow of the domestic hot water buffer
storage tank.

Legionella protection circuit:


A legionella protection circuit can be set. The switching can be selected every day or every week. The legionella
temperature can be set between 65…70 °C. The necessary primary charging temperature must be 5 K above the
legionella temperature.

The legionella circuit is controlled according to parameter “Legionella protection mode” 05-017.

Mode 0 = No legionella protection circuit


Mode 1 = Legionella protection circuit active. Charging through with “Legionella protection temperature” up to SF2 incl.
after-run time.
Mode 2 = Mode 1 active - in addition, the “Legionella protection temperature circulation” must be reached on the cir-
culation sensor
Mode 3 = Legionella protection circuit active. Charging through until the “Legionella protection temperature” is reached
on the DHW return sensor incl. after-run time.
Mode 4 = Mode 3 active - in addition, the “Legionella protection temperature circulation” must be reached on the cir-
culation sensor.
Modes 5 to 8 correspond to modes 1 to 4 with, in addition to the set time, a legionella protection function (charging up
to SF2) is carried out.

In hydraulic 60, the output VA4 cannot be selected freely.

144 4 214 513 / 04


Charging systems:

Parameter settings for hydraulic 60 Par. Designation Value


07-021 P-band circulation 50.0 K
General – configuration:
05-017 Legionella protection mode 1
Par. Designation Value
05-014 Legionella protection day 0
04-077 Hydraulic application 60
05-015 Legionella protection time 3h
04-076 Function application general HC 1
05-016 Legionella prot. temperature circulation 60 °C
01-203 Return temperature DHW at -20 °C 60 °C
05-100 P-band ch. pump RT 5.0 K
01-204 Return temperature DHW at +20 °C 60 °C
05-101 Differential set ch. pump RT 10.0 K
01-205 Factor return limitation 10 %
05-102 P-band ch. pump FL 10 K

Heating circuit 1, 33=PFC - parameters 05-103 Adjusting time ch. pump FL 300 sec

Par. Designation Value 05-104 Delay message DHW actual value deviation 5.0 h

07-020 Adjusting time 20 sec (Siemens SAS31.03) 05-105 Message circ set not reached 5K

07-021 P-band 4 K (Siemens SAS31.03) 05-106 Delay message circ act. value deviation 1h

07-022 Controller runtime 15 sec (Siemens SAS31.03)


07-023 Mixer calculation 2
Allocation:
07-024 Mixer running time 30 sec (Siemens SAS31.03)
Designation schematic Connection controller
Hot water 1 - configuration YFW: YFW
Par. Designation Value SLP1: DKP
32-032 Alloc. recirculation pump ZKP output 7=SLP1 SLP2: SLP2
30-021 Alloc. circulation sensor ZF input 11=VE7 SLP2/0-10V: VA3
ZKP: SLP1
32-045 Tank operation return limitation …
ZKP/0-10V: VA 4
30-049 Sensor no. 2 VA5: VA5 (0-10V valve)
RLF: RLF
Hot water 1 - parameters VFW: VF
Par. Designation Value SF1: SF1
05-087 Reference value request type hot water 1:H-Gen/DH SF2: SF2
05-089 Allocation plant flow control 33 VFP: VE 5
RLFZ: VE 7
05-000 Switch-on diff. hot water supply 3.0 K
SF3: VE 3
05-001 Charging setpoint elevation 3.0 K
05-002 Hot water loading preference 0.1 h VA1: Temperature request 0-10 V / 4-20 mA for external
05-004 Legionella prot. temperature 60 °C heat generator
05-005 DHW discharge protection/charging stop 1 VE2: Discharge protection
05-006 Circulating pump function 3
05-011 Hot water charging mode Charging
module
05-034 Oversh. charging setpoint elevation mixer 10.0 K
control
05-050 Hot water operation choice Constant
05-051 Normal DHW temperature 57.0 °C
05-052 Switch-on temp. DHW storage tank circuit 60 °C
pump (SLP2)
05-058 Switch-on temp. DHW storage tank circuit 8K
pump hysteresis
05-053 Tank circuit pump switch-on delay 10sec
05-056 DHW sensor 2 (TS 2) switch-off offset 0.0 K
05-081 Maximum hot water charging time 10.0 h
05-083 Hot water charging interruption 0.0 h
05-008 After-run time DHW_charging pump (SLP1) 60 sec
05-009 After-run time process water pump BWP 60 sec
(SLP2)
07-020 Adjusting time circulation 900 sec

4 214 513 / 04 145


Charging systems:

11.3 Hydraulic 61_TransTherm aqua F

“Technical” description of function

Charging operation with automatic output adjustment:


The primary heating side has pilot control by the HC1 (PFC33) via a 3-point control system (YFW) and the feed pump
(DKP).

This heating circuit is active as soon as there is a reference value request.


The reference value request results from a DHW draw-off, circulation request or the temperature holding using a swit-
ching program.

The reference value (DHW reference value + charging reference value increase par. 05-001) is now passed onto the
control valve YFW for pilot control.
The speed-controlled pump DKP regulates the reference value (DHW reference value) on the heat exchanger outlet.

The changeover valve YK1 is switched after temperature comparison RLF to SF2. If RLF > SF2 then the upper area
of the buffer storage tank is stratified and otherwise in the lower range.

Circulation mode:
For Aqua F, the circulation must be set to the default.
The circulation temperature is set using the time program special heating programs circulation.
Several circulating pump functions can be configured using parameter 05-006. The factory setting is configuration 3
(active after time program with reference value forwarding and speed control).

The pre-control circuit HC1 is active in circulation mode. The speed-controlled recirculation pump ZKP regulates the
required circulation temperature at the circulation sensor RLFZ.

General:
The temperatures of calorifier sensor 1 (SF1), calorifier sensor 2 (SF2), the return sensor for the cold water line
(RLF2), the return sensor for the heat exchanger RLF and the circulation filter (RLFZ) or the flow sensor (VFP) can be
configured on the TTE control module for analysis and evaluation purposes.
Parameter settings for hydraulic 61

146 4 214 513 / 04


Charging systems:

General – configuration: 05-108 = Settings at a higher value make the actuator


Par. Designation Value valve more aggressive, a lower value produces a less
04-077 Hydraulic application 61
aggressive response of the mixing valve (default setting
100%)
04-076 Function application general HC 1

05-001 = Straightness of profile at full flow rate of the HE


General - sensors:
05-107 = Value for which the HE is configured. (E.g.:
Par. Designation Value system is configured for 90 kW corresponding to CW10°/
20-070 Vol. flow pulse gen pulse rate VE10/IMP …/l DHW60° 25.71 l/min. interacts with 05-001).
20-080 Volume flow pulse gen. offset VE10/IMP …l/min
05-001 = The elevation charging reference value increa-
Heating circuit 1, 33=PFC - parameters ses the charging temperature compared to the DHW-re-
ference.
Par. Designation Value
07-020 Adjusting time 50 sec (Siemens 31.008)
07-021 P-band 500 K (Siemens 31.008) Allocation:
07-022 Controller runtime 10 sec (Siemens 31.008)
07-023 Mixer calculation 2 Designation schematic Connection controller
07-024 Mixer running time 8sec (Siemens 31.008)
YFW: YFW
SLP1: DKP
DKP/0-10V: VA 3
ZKP: SLP1
Hot water 1 - configuration
ZKP/0-10V: VA 4
Par. Designation Value
Switching valve OPEN/TOP: YK1/OPEN
32-032 Alloc. recirculation pump ZKP output 7=SLP1 Switching valve
30-021 Alloc. inp. circulation sensor ZF 11=VE7 CLOSED/BOTTOM: YK1/CLOSED
30-049 Sensor no. 2** RLF: RLF
VFW: VF
SF1: buffer SF1
Hot water 1 - parameters SF2: buffer SF2
Par. Designation Value
VFP: VE 5
RLFZ: VE 7
05-087 Setpoint req. type hot water 0:none
RLF2: VE 3
05-089 Allocation plant flow control 33 FVT: VE10/IMP
05-001 Charging setpoint elevation 7.0 K
05-006 Circulating pump function 3
05-050 Hot water operation choice Constant
05-051 Normal DHW temperature 60.0 °C
07-020 Adjusting time circulation 900 sec
07-021 P-band circulation 50.0 K
05-100 P-band ch. pump RT 15 K
05-102 P-band ch. pump FL 30 K
05-103 Adjusting time ch. pump FL 10sec
05-104 Delay message DHW actual value deviation 5.0 h
05-105 Notification circ. ref. not reached 5K
05-106 Delay message circ. actual value deviation 1h
05-107 Flow rate DW ... l/min
05-108 P-factor DW 100 %
05-109 Option switching valve 1

4 214 513 / 04 147


Charging systems:

11.4 Input/output table for hydraulics 59, 60 and 61


TTE-DH
Function DKP YFW MK1 YK1 SLP1 SLP2 AF RLF VF VF1 SF1 SF2 VE1 VE 2 VE3* VE 4 VE5*
Hydr. 59* HC 1 SLP1 YFW ZKP SLP2 RLF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP
Hydr. 60* HC 1 SLP1 YFW ZKP SLP2 RLF VFW SF1 SF2 RLF2 VFP
Hydr. 61* HC 1 SLP1 YFW Y11 ZKP RLF VFW SF1** SF2** RLF2 VFP

TTE-DH
Function VE 6 VE 7 VE 8 VE 9 VE10 VA1 VA2 VA 3 VA 4 VA 5 M-BUS
Hydr. 59* H C RLFZ SLP2/0-10V ZKP/0-10V
1
Hydr. 60* H C RLFZ SLP2/0-10V ZKP/0-10V VA5/0-10V
1
Hydr. 61* H C RLFZ FVT SLP1/0-10V ZKP/0-10V
1

*VE3 = Secondary return sensor


*VE5 = Primary flow sensor (optional)
* from hydr. 59 = speed control fitted in the pumps
** Sensors via telegrams

11.5 Settings for Huba sensors of the aqua F


Parameter 20-070 Parameter 20-080
Flow rate type Dimension Range
Pulse rate imp/ltr. Offset l/min

Huba type 200 DN6 G 3/4″ male thread 0.5 … 10 l/min 2521 -0.14
Huba type 200 DN8 G 3/4″ male thread 0.9 … 15 l/min 1523 -0.3
Huba type 200 DN10 G 3/4″ male 1.8 … 32 l/min 721 -0.2
thread
Huba type 200 DN15 G 3/4″ male 3.5 … 50 l/min 329 -0.2
thread
Huba type 200 DN20 G 1″ male thread 5.0 … 85 l/min 162 -0.3
Huba type 235 DN10 G 1″ male thread 2 … 40 l/min 714 -0.2
Huba type 235 DN32 K G 6/4″ 14 … 240 l/min 36 -1.47

11.6 Additional information about the charging systems

11.6.1 Hydraulic 60_TransTherm aqua LS:


Minimum speed of the SLP2:
Depending on the operating point of the circulation, it can happen that the recirculation pump builds up a backpressure
against the SLP2 and the SLP2 (in return cooling) cannot generate any flow rate.
As a result, the minimum speed of the SLP2 must be increased accordingly. This is done with parameter General /
General / 0-10V/PWM / 20-039 “Characteristic curve 1 voltage (Y1) at X1”
0 … 3V would be a reasonable value. This point should be selected high enough to ensure a flow rate but also be low
enough to retain an extended return cooling.
In parallel to this, the parameter General / General / 0-10V/PWM / 20-054 “Characteristic curve 1 switch-off voltage”
must be set to 20-039+0.1V (i.e. 0.1V…3.1V).

148 4 214 513 / 04


Charging systems:

11.6.2 Hydraulic 61_TransTherm aqua F:


Sensor for buffer storage tank:
If the heat generator which loads the buffer storage is controlled with a Hoval TTE, the temperatures SF1 and SF2 can
be requested via the bus and do not need to be installed separately.

This is done using CAN-LON gateway datapoint 1 and 2.

Example of requesting SF1 and SF2 from a H-Gen with CAN address 1
01-293 CAN-LON-Gateway DP1 0001.002.000.00004 Data point 1 (SF1)
01-294 CAN-LON-Gateway DP2 0001.002.000.00006 Data point 2 (SF2)

Example of requesting SF1 and SF2 from a TTE-DH with CAN address 1
01-293 CAN-LON-Gateway DP1 0193.002.000.00004 Data point 1 (SF1)
01-294 CAN-LON-Gateway DP2 0193.002.000.00006 Data point 2 (SF2)

Readiness switching:
If no draw-off is taking place and the circulation is not active either (deactivated, deactivation by time program or ther-
mostat switching), the heat exchanger is kept in readiness by the basic parameter settings. This means in order to
provide heat quickly when a draw off takes place, the YFW and SLP1 remain in operation and the heat exchanger is
kept at the reference value.

If the readiness switching should be deactivated for energy saving, i.e. at night, set the reference value to “0” in the
time program “Week 1” of the WW1 for the corresponding times.

! Note: The “Week 1” program of the WW1 is not allowed to be used for defining the actual DHW-reference value, but
only as a time program for the readiness switching. Constant operation is recommended, and if different temperatures
really are wanted then this can be done using the “Week 2” program.

4 214 513 / 04 149


Error code list 1):

12. Error code list 1):

1000 2 Outdoor sensor AF


1001 2 Return sensor (RLF)
1002 3 Flow sensor circuit 1 - DKP (VF)
1003 3 Flow sensor MK1 (VF1)
1004 3 Tank sensor top (SF1)
1005 3 Tank sensor bottom (SF2)
1006 2 Return sensor (VE3)
1007 2 Secondary return sensor (VE4)
1008 2 Primary flow sensor (VE5)
1009 2 Sensor VE6
1010 2 Sensor VE7
1011 2 Sensor VE8
1012 2 Sensor VE9
1013 3 Flow sensor HC module expansion 1
1014 2 Return sensor HC module expansion 1
1015 3 Excess temperature HC module expansion 1
1016 2 Set/actual deviation HC module expansion 1
1017 2 Set/actual deviation room temperature HC module expansion 1
1018 3 Flow sensor HC module expansion 2
1019 2 Return sensor HC module expansion 2
1020 3 Excess temperature HC module expansion 2
1021 2 Set/actual deviation HC module expansion 2
1022 2 Set/actual deviation room temperature HC module expansion 2
1023 3 Flow sensor HC module expansion 3
1024 2 Return sensor HC module expansion 3
1025 3 Excess temperature HC module expansion 3
1026 2 Set/actual deviation HC module expansion 3
1027 2 Set/actual deviation room temperature HC module expansion 3
1028 3 Tank sensor top DHW module expansion 1
1029 3 Tank sensor bottom DHW module expansion 1
1030 3 Tank sensor top DHW module expansion 2
1031 3 Tank sensor bottom DHW module expansion 2
1032 3 Tank sensor top DHW module expansion 3
1033 3 Tank sensor bottom DHW module expansion 3
1034 3 Tank sensor top DHW module expansion 4

150 4 214 513 / 04


Error code list 1):

1035 3 Tank sensor bottom DHW module expansion 4


1036 2 Fault M-BUS unit 1
1037 2 Fault M-BUS unit 2
1038 2 Fault M-BUS unit 3
1039 2 Fault M-BUS unit 4
1040 2 Fault M-BUS unit 5
1041 2 Fault M-BUS unit 6
1042 2 Fault M-BUS unit 7
1043 2 Fault M-BUS unit 8
1044 2 Fault M-BUS unit 9
1045 2 Fault M-BUS unit 10
1046 2 Fault M-BUS unit 11
1047 2 Fault M-BUS unit 12
1048 2 Fault M-BUS unit 13
1049 2 Fault M-BUS unit 14
1050 2 Fault M-BUS unit 15
1051 2 Fault M-BUS unit 16
1052 2 Set/actual deviation circuit 1 DKP
1053 2 Set/actual deviation room temperature circuit 1 DKP
1054 2 Set/actual deviation MK1
1055 2 Set/actual deviation room temperature MK1
1056 2 Set/actual deviation circulation
1057 2 Thermostatic sensor 1
1058 2 Thermostatic sensor 2
1059 2 Thermostatic sensor 3
1060 2 Differential sensor 1
1061 2 Differential sensor 2
1062 2 Differential sensor 3
1063 2 External fault via digital contact
1064 7 System pressure
1065 7 Maintenance necessary
1066 5 Screed drying active
1067 1 Frost protection active
1068 2 Fault VE10/IMP
1069 2 Legionella prot. temperature not reached

4 214 513 / 04 151


Error code list 1):

1070 2 Hot water actual value deviation


1071 2 Fault MOD bus
1072 4 Fault electronics
1073 2 DHW charging stop blocked
1074 2 Validation error
1075 3 Module failure FE3
1076 3 Module failure FE4
1077 3 Module failure FE5
1078 3 Module failure FE4
1079 3 Module failure FE5
1080 3 Flow sensor
1081 2 Return sensor
1082 2 Malfunction
1083 3 Failure
1084 2 Sensor OS
1085 2 Sensor RS
1086 2 Sensor VF
1087 2 Sensor VF1
1088 2 Sensor SF1
1089 2 Sensor SF2
1090 2 Sensor VE3
1091 2 Sensor VE4
1092 2 Sensor VE5
1093 2 Set/actual deviation
1094 3 Power failure

1)
Controller malfunctions, automatic device malfunctions see corresponding instructions

152 4 214 513 / 04


4 214 513 / 04 153
Responsibility for energy and environment

You might also like